MINI Countryman Manual

Everything from A to Z
Contents
A -Z
OWNER'S MANUAL
MINI COUNTRYMAN
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Cooper Congratulations on your new MINI
Cooper S This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of
this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide
Cooper S ALL4 the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte-
nance information.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/12, 03 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a particu- COMMUNICATIONS 157
lar topic or item is by using the index, refer to 158 Hands-free device Bluetooth
page 240. 167 Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
180 Office
188 MINI Connected
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects MOBILITY 191
192 Refueling
AT A GLANCE 9
194 Wheels and tires
10 Cockpit
202 Engine compartment
16 Onboard computer
206 Maintenance
20 Letters and numbers
208 Care
21 Voice activation system
212 Replacing components
CONTROLS 25 222 Giving and receiving assistance
26 Opening and closing
REFERENCE 227
37 Adjustments
228 Technical data
44 Transporting children safely
232 Short commands for the voice activation
48 Driving
system
58 Controls overview
240 Everything from A to Z
69 Technology for driving comfort and safety
81 Lamps
85 Climate
90 Practical interior accessories
DRIVING TIPS 99
100 Things to remember when driving
NAVIGATION 111
112 Navigation system
114 Destination entry
123 Route guidance
131 What to do if…
ENTERTAINMENT 133
134 On/off and tone
137 Radio
144 CD player
146 External devices

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Manual
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
We have tried to make all the information in this voice activation system.
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed Symbols on vehicle components
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to Indicates that you should consult the rele-
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will vant section of this Owner's Manual for
find this in the first chapter. information on a particular part or assembly.
Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in
the future, remember to hand over this Owner's
Manual to the new owner; it is an important part Vehicle equipment
of the vehicle.
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische
Additional sources of information Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Should you have any other questions, your MINI This Owner's Manual describes all models as well
dealer will be glad to advise you at any time. as all production, country and special equip-
ment that is offered in the model range. Equip-
You can find more information about the MINI,
ment is also described that is not available
for example on its technology, on the Internet at
because of, for example, selected options or
www.MINI.com.
country version. This also applies to safety
related functions and systems. For equipment
and models that are not described in this
Symbols used Owner's Manual, please see the supplementary
Indicates precautions that must be fol- Owner's Manuals that are provided.
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.< Status of this Owner's
Indicates information that will assist you in Manual at time of
gaining the optimum benefit from your printing
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.< The high level of safety and quality of the MINI
Refers to measures that can be taken to vehicles is ensured through continuous develop-
help protect the environment.< ment. In rare cases, there may be differences
between the description and the vehicle.
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
4
Notes
For your safety Installation and operation of accessories that

have not been approved by the manufacturer of
your MINI, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers,
Maintenance and repair
radar detectors, wheels, suspension compo-
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of nents, brake dust shields, telephones, including
modern materials and high-performance operation of any mobile phone from within the
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- vehicle without using an externally mounted
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have the antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance,
necessary work on your MINI only carried out by CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar acces-
a MINI dealer or a workshop that has specially sories, may cause extensive damage to the vehi-
trained personnel working in accordance with cle, compromise its safety, interfere with the
the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of
this work is not carried out properly, there is a the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI dealer
danger of subsequent damage and related for additional information.<
safety hazards.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems
Parts and accessories
may be performed by any automotive repair
For your own safety, use genuine parts establishment or individual using any certified
and accessories approved by the manu- automotive part.<
facturer of the MINI.
When you purchase accessories tested California Proposition 65 warning
and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI California law requires us to issue the following
and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously warning:
acquire the assurance that they have been thor-
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
oughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI
automobile components and parts,
to ensure optimum performance when installed
including components found in the interior fur-
on your vehicle.
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these known to the State of California to cause cancer
parts to be free from defects in material and and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
workmanship. addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any certain products of component wear contain or
liability for damage resulting from installation of emit chemicals known to the State of California
parts and accessories not approved by the man- to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ufacturer of the MINI. ductive harm.
The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
product made by other manufacturers to verify contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk hands after handling.
to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu- Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
pants. caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
products approved by the manufacturer of the soap and water.<
MINI, together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all MINI dealers.
5
Notes
Service and warranty If the vehicle is not maintained according to

these specifications, this could result in serious
We recommend that you read this publication damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov-
thoroughly. ered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your MINI is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty Reporting safety defects
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
For US customers
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
The following applies only to vehicles owned
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty and operated in the US.
> California Emission Control System Limited If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
Warranty could cause a crash or could cause injury or
Detailed information about these warranties is death, you should immediately inform the
listed in the Service and Warranty Information National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
designed to meet the particular operating con- 1117.
ditions and homologation requirements in your If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
country and continental region in order to open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
is operated under those conditions. If you wish a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
to operate your vehicle in another country or cannot become involved in individual problems
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi- between you, your dealer, or MINI of North
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi- America, LLC.
tions and registration requirements. You should To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita- Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
such a case, please contact Customer Relations http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
for further information. Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
Maintenance other information about motor vehicle safety
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain road from http://www.safercar.gov
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty. For Canadian customers
Specifications for required maintenance mea- Canadian customers who wish to report a
sures: safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
> MINI Maintenance System Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
You can also obtain other information about
for US models
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for roadsafety.
Canadian models
6
Notes
7
Watch Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and that is not available because of, for example,
optional equipment that is offered in the model selected options or country version. This also
range is described. Equipment is also described applies to safety related functions and systems.
Around the steering wheel
10
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors in and out 42 7 Buttons on steering wheel,

2 right,
Parking lamps 81 Resuming cruise control 56
Low beams 81
Automatic headlamp control 81 Storing speed and accelerating or

Adaptive Light Control 82 decelerating
Turn signals 53
High beams 83
Headlamp flasher 53 Activating/deactivating cruise
or
control 56
Roadside parking lamps 83
Computer 59
Left side
3 Tachometer 12
Increasing or reducing volume
Instrument lighting 83
Resetting the trip odometer 58 Telephone

Press: Accepting and ending a call,
4 starting dialing of selected phone
Wiper system 53 number and redialing if no phone
number is selected
5 Switching the ignition on/off and

starting/stopping the engine 48 Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system 21
6 Ignition lock 48
Changing the radio station
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
8 Horn: the entire surface

9 Adjusting the steering wheel 43
10 Releasing the hood 203
11
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Displays
1 Tachometer 58 4 Display for

with indicator and warning lamps 13 > Position of automatic transmission 50
2 Display for > Computer 59
> Current vehicle speed 58 > Date of next scheduled service, and
> Indicator and warning lamps 13 remaining distance to be driven 62
3 Resetting the trip odometer 58 > Odometer and trip odometer 58

> Settings and information 60
> Personal Profile settings 26
5 Instrument lighting 83
6 Speedometer
with indicator and warning lamps 13
7 Control Display 17
8 Fuel gauge 58
12
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Indicator and warning

lamps
The concept
You can call up more information, e.g. on the

cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, page 65.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in indicator area 1
Indicator lamps without text messages
or 2.
The following indicator lamps in display area 1
Some lamps will be tested for proper functioning indicate certain functions:
when the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on and will therefore light up briefly. High beams/headlamp flasher 83
Explanatory text messages Front fog lamps 83

Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the drive
forces in order to maintain driving
stability 70
Parking brake applied 50
Engine malfunction with adverse effect

on exhaust emissions 207
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Cruise control 56

Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Turn signals 53
13
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Around the center console
1 Hazard warning flashers 4 Air conditioner or automatic climate

2 Speedometer 12 control 85
3 Radio/CD 137 Temperature
Selecting waveband
Recirculated-air mode
Changing the audio source

Air distribution for air conditioner
Changing the radio station or track

Air distribution to the windshield
Ejecting CD Air distribution to the upper body

area
14
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
7 Changing to a different menu on the Control

Air distribution to the footwell Display 18
Automatic air distribution and flow 8 MINI joystick 16
rate Move in four directions, turn or press
9 USB audio interface 147
Maximum cooling
10 Accessing the main menu on the Control
Display 17
Cooling function
or Around the headliner
Defrosting windows
Rear window defroster
Windshield heating
Air flow rate

1 Microphone for voice activation system and
for telephone in hands-free mode
5 Switches in the center console
2 Indicator/warning lamp for front passenger
Seat heating 40 airbags 80
3
Reading lamps 84
Power windows, front 35
Ambient lighting 84
Power windows, rear 35
Glass roof, electric 34

Central locking system, inside 30
Interior lamps 84
6 Buttons in the center console
Front fog lamps 83
Safety switch for power windows in

rear passenger compartment 36
Sport button 72
Driving stability control systems

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 70
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 71
15
AT A GLANCE Onboard computer
Onboard computer
Vehicle equipment Control Display
In this chapter, all production, country, and Notes

optional equipment that is offered in the model > When cleaning the Control Display, follow
range is described. Equipment is also described the care instructions.
that is not available because of, for example,
> Do not place any objects in the area of the
selected options or country version. This also
Control Display; otherwise, the Control Dis-
applies to safety related functions and systems.
play can be damaged.
Switching Control Display off/on

The concept
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right repeat-
The onboard computer integrates the functions edly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
of a large number of switches. This allows these 2. "Switch off control display"
functions to be operated from a single central
position. The following section provides an
introduction to basic menu navigation. The con-
trol of the individual functions is described in
connection with the relevant equipment.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
To switch on, press the MINI joystick.

Overview of operating
elements MINI joystick with buttons
Selecting menu items and carrying out settings.
Controls 1. Turning 1 and pressing 2.
1 Control Display
2 MINI joystick with buttons
16
Onboard computer AT A GLANCE
2. Tilting in four directions. Opening the main menu

Press the button.
Buttons on MINI joystick

All functions of the onboard computer can be
Button Function accessed via the main menu.
Accessing the main menu

Selecting a menu item
Menu items displayed in white can be selected.
Changing to another menu
1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
2. Press the MINI joystick.

A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Using the button on the MINI joystick:
To hide the message: Press the button.
Press the MINI joystick.
Each time that the button is pressed, the menu
The main menu is displayed.
items "Navigation", "Radio", "CD/Multimedia"
The message is automatically hidden after and "Telephone" are called up, one after
approx. 10 seconds. another.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
17
AT A GLANCE Onboard computer
Changing between panels The following is displayed in the "Options"

After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new menu:
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can > Screen settings.
overlap. > Control options for the selected menu.
> Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Current panel is closed and the previous Adjusting settings
panel is displayed. 1. Select a field.
> Move the MINI joystick to the right. 2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-
The new panel is opened and placed on top. ting is displayed.
Arrows pointing left or right indicate that addi- 3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set-
tional panels can be accessed. ting.
View of a menu that has been called up Activating/deactivating functions

In general, when a menu is called up, the panel Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
that was last selected in the menu is displayed. It indicates whether the function is activated or
To display the first panel of the menu: deactivated.
Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates
Move the MINI joystick as often to the left as
the function.
necessary until the first panel is displayed.
Function is activated.
Opening the Options menu Function is deactivated.
Move the MINI joystick to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is displayed.
18
Onboard computer AT A GLANCE
Example: setting the clock Status information

1. Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
1 Time
2 Telephone status
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is > Roaming active
selected, and press the MINI joystick. > Text message received
3 Reception strength of the wireless net-
work, depends on the mobile phone
4 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD, external devices
> Telephone:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
5 Sound output is switched off or
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time:" is
display for traffic bulletins:
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and

press the MINI joystick.
6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
19
AT A GLANCE Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers
Vehicle equipment Switching between letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch
In this chapter, all production, country, and between entering letters and numbers:
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
Symbol Function
selected options or country version. This also Entering letters
Entering numbers
Entering letters and

Switching between uppercase and
numbers lowercase letters
1. Turn the MINI joystick: select the letters or Depending on the menu, you can switch
numbers. between entering uppercase letters and lower-
case letters:
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
Symbol Function
3. "OK": Confirm entry.
Move the MINI joystick
forward: to switch from
uppercase letters to lower-
case letters
Move the MINI joystick

forward: to switch from
lowercase letters to upper-
case letters
Symbol Function
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Press the MINI joystick: Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
delete one letter or num- narrowed down every time a letter is entered
ber and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
Press and hold the
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
MINI joystick: delete all let-
ters or numbers > The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are avail-
Enter a blank space able.
> Town/city names can be entered with the
spelling used in any of the languages avail-
able on the Control Display.
20
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment Saying commands

In this chapter, all production, country, and
Activating voice activation system
range is described. Equipment is also described 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
The concept
> By using the voice activation system, most of
the functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated via voice
commands. The system supports the entry This symbol on the Control Display and
process by means of announcements. an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
> Functions that can only be used while the activation system is ready to receive spoken
vehicle is not moving cannot be operated via commands.
the voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone in
the vicinity of the rearview mirror.
Prerequisite
So that voice commands can be identified, set a
language on the Control Display that is sup-
ported by the voice activation system.
To set the language, see page 67.
2. Say the command.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
{...} Say the specified commands word for
This symbol is displayed on the Control Dis-
word.
play when you can enter additional commands.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
If no further commands are possible, continue
vation system.
by operating the item of equipment via the
onboard computer.
21
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Terminating or canceling voice Using alternative commands

activation system There are often a number of commands to run a
Press the button on the steering wheel function, e.g.:
or {Radio} or {Radio on}
{Cancel}
Carrying out functions through short
Commands commands
Individual menu items on the Control Display Main menu functions can be executed immedi-
can be voiced as commands. ately by short commands, almost regardless of
The commands that are possible depend upon which menu item is selected, e.g., {Vehicle sta-
which menu is currently shown on the Control tus}.
Display. List of voice activation system short commands,
There are short commands for functions in the see page 232.
main menu.
Opening the main menu
Some list items, for example telephone book
listings, can also be selected using the voice acti- {Main menu}
vation system. In particular, say the list items
exactly as they are displayed in the respective Example: selecting the track of a CD
list. 1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
Having the possible commands read 2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
aloud
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
Having the possible commands read aloud: {C D track …}
{Voice commands} The system replies:
{{Track …}}
For example if you have selected "CD" the sys-
tem will read aloud the possible commands for Setting the voice dialog
operating the CD player. You can set whether the voice activation system
uses the standard dialog or the short version.
Help for the voice activation system With the short version of the spoken dialog, the
Calling up Help: requests and responses of the voice activation
{Help} system are shortened.
1. "Settings"
Additional commands for Help: 2. "Language/Units"
> {Help with examples}: Information about
the current operating options and the most
important commands for them are
announced.
> {Help with voice activation}: Information
regarding the principles behind the voice
activation system is announced.
22
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
Notes
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an emergency call. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish-
ment of a telephone connection.
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the stan-
dard pronunciation of the station name
{Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
23
Handle Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment In addition, information about service require-

ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
In this chapter, all production, country, and Service data in the remote control, page 206.
range is described. Equipment is also described New remote controls
that is not available because of, for example, Your MINI dealer can supply new remote con-
selected options or country version. This also trols as additional units or as replacements in the
applies to safety related functions and systems. event of loss.
Integrated key
Keys/remote controls
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, page 29
1 Opening the tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Locking Personal Profile
General information The concept
Each remote control contains a rechargeable The functions of your MINI can be set individu-
battery that is recharged when it is in the igni- ally. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these
tion lock while the car is being driven. You settings are stored for the remote control cur-
should therefore use each remote control at rently in use. When you unlock the car, the
least twice a year to maintain the charge status. remote control is recognized and the settings
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the stored for it are called up and implemented.
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
This means that your settings will be activated
page 34.
for you, even if in the meantime your car was
If more than one remote control unit is used, the used by someone else with another remote con-
settings called up and implemented depend on trol and the corresponding settings.
which remote control is recognized when the
At most three remote controls can be set for
car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile,
three different people. A prerequisite is that
page 26.
each person uses a separate remote control.
26
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Personal Profile settings Operating from outside

For more information on specific settings, refer > Via the remote control
to the specified pages. > Using the door lock
> Response of the central locking system > In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
when the car is being unlocked 27 handles on the driver's and passenger's
> Automatic locking of the vehicle 30 sides
> Triple turn signal activation 53 The remote control can also be used to switch
> Settings for the displays on the onboard on/off the welcome lamps and interior lamps.
computer, in the speedometer and in the The alarm system is also activated or deacti-
tachometer: vated, page 31.
> 12 h/24 h mode of the clock 64

Operating from inside
> Date format 65
Button for central locking system, page 30.
> Brightness of the Control Display 68
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
> Language on the Control Display 67 central locking system unlocks automatically. In
> Units of measure for fuel consumption, addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
distance covered/remaining distances rior lamps come on.
and temperature 62
> Light settings:
> Pathway lighting 82
Opening and closing:
> Daytime running lights 82 from outside
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac- Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
tivating the AUTO program, setting the tem- could lock the doors from the inside. Take
perature, air volume and air distribution 87 the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
> Entertainment: that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
side.<
> Audio volume 135
> Tone control 135 Using the remote control
Unlocking
Central locking system Press the button.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation Unlocking mode
whenever the driver's door is closed. You can also set which parts of the car are
The system simultaneously engages and unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote
releases the locks on the following: control in use.
> Doors
> Tailgate
> Fuel filler flap
27
1. "Settings" vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without

special knowledge.<
Setting confirmation signals

To have the vehicle confirm when it has been
locked or unlocked.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"

Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle
is switched on.
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors" Switching on interior lamps
Press the button once to unlock While the car is locked:
the entire vehicle. Press the button.
> "Driver's door only" You can also use this function to locate your
Press the button once to unlock vehicle in parking garages, etc.
only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap. Unlocking tailgate
Press the button twice to unlock the Press the button for approx. 1 second
entire vehicle. and then release it.
When it is opened, the tailgate swings out
Convenient opening and up toward the rear. Make sure that
Press and hold the button. adequate clearance is available before opening.
The power windows are opened and the glass To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do
roof is tilted. not place the key down in the cargo area. If the
Convenient closing is not possible by tailgate was locked before opening, it will be
means of the remote control.< locked again after it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
Locking gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
28
Malfunctions Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

The remote control may malfunction due to there is any person inside, because the
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
the car at the door lock with the integrated key. special knowledge.<
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote When there is no alarm system or Comfort
control, the battery in the remote control is dis- Access, only the driver's door is locked
charged. Use this remote control during an with the door lock.<
extended drive; this will recharge the battery, To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail-
page 26. gate together:
> With the doors closed, press the interior cen-
For US owners only tral locking button, page 30, to lock the
The transmitter and receiver units comply with vehicle.
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications > Unlocking and opening the driver or passen-
Commission regulations. Operation is governed ger door, page 30.
by the following:
Lock the vehicle.
FCC ID:
> Lock the driver's door with the integrated
LX8766S
key via the door lock, or
LX8766E
LX8CAS > Press the safety lock button on the pas-
senger's door and close the door from
Compliance statement:
the outside.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Convenience operation
With an alarm system or Comfort Access, the
> This device must not cause harmful interfer-
windows and glass roof can be operated via the
ence, and
door lock.
> This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may Opening/closing
cause undesired operation.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
Any unauthorized modifications or locking.
changes to these devices could void the
Watch during the closing process to be
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
key stops the operation.<
Using the door lock
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turn-
ing the integrated key in the door lock to the end
positions.
You can set which parts of the car are unlocked,

page 27.
29
Opening and closing: Automatic locking

from inside You can also set the situations in which the car
locks. The setting is stored for the remote con-
trol in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select a menu item:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle after a short time if no
door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
The switch locks or unlocks the doors and tail-
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
gate when the doors are closed, but the anti-
theft system is not activated. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening

> Either unlock the doors together using the
switch for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> Pull on the door handle of either door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
time opens it. rently in use.
Locking
> Press the switch or Tailgate
> Press down the safety lock button of a door.
To avoid damage, make sure there is
To prevent you from being locked out, the
sufficient clearance before opening the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
tailgate.<
the lock button.
While driving, sharp objects or objects
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
with edges may strike against the rear
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
window and damage the heating element for
the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
the rear window. Assure that there are no
that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
objects with sharp edges near the rear win-
side.<
dow.<
30
Opening Alarm system

In some market-specific versions, the tail-
gate cannot be unlocked using the remote The concept
control unless the vehicle is unlocked first.
The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:
Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other-
wise, the tail lamps will be obscured and driving > A door, the engine compartment lid or the
safety will be compromised.< tailgate is opened
> There is movement inside the car
> The car's inclination changes, for instance if
an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing it away
> There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery
The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized
entry or tampering by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
Press the top side of the MINI emblem, arrow, or > Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and then release it. The Arming and disarming
tailgate is unlocked.
General information
Closing Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the
Make sure that the closing path of the tail- alarm system is armed or disarmed.
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may
occur.< Door lock with armed alarm system
Take the remote control with you and do Because of the design, unlocking the door lock
not put it into the luggage compartment: may trigger the alarm in some countries.
otherwise, the remote control can be locked in To turn off the alarm, unlock the vehicle using
the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.< the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate with armed alarm system

Even when the alarm system is armed, you can
open the tailgate by means of the button
on the remote control.
When you subsequently close the tailgate it is
again locked and monitored.
Panic mode
The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of You can activate the alarm system if you find
the tailgate make it easier to pull it down. yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least two seconds.
Switching off the alarm:
Press any button.
31
Switching off an alarm Interior movement detector

> Unlock the car with the remote control. Before the interior movement detector can
> Insert the key fully into the ignition lock. operate correctly, the windows and glass roof
must be closed.
> In cars with Comfort Access, press the button
on the door lock.
Avoiding false alarms
Display on the revolution counter The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector can be switched off together.
When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After
approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes. This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
trains, ferries or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior movement detector
> Press the button on the remote con-
> LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed. trol twice in succession.
> One LED flashes at short intervals: > Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated
Doors, the hood or the tailgate are not prop- key.
erly closed. Even if these are not closed fully, LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
the remaining items are deadlocked and the 2 seconds.
LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds for The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED detector are switched off until the car is next
flashes. unlocked and locked.
The interior movement detector is not acti-
vated.
> LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked: Comfort Access
No attempt was made to tamper with the
car. The concept
> LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is Access to the vehicle is possible without the use
inserted in the ignition, but for no longer of the remote control. All you need to do is wear
than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was the remote control close to your body, e.g. in
made to tamper with the vehicle. your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control within the immedi-
Tilt alarm sensor ate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm Comfort Access supports the following func-
is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made tions:
to steal the vehicle's wheels or tow it away. > Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
> Unlocking the tailgate separately
> Starting the engine
32
Functional requirements Locking

> There are no external malfunction sources in Press button 1.
the vicinity. For Convenient closing, press and hold button 1.
> For locking, the remote control must be out- In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof
side of the vehicle. are closed.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds. Unlocking the tailgate separately
> The engine can only be started if the remote Press the top side of the MINI emblem.
control is in the vehicle. If the vehicle detects that a remote control
> The doors and tailgate must be closed to be has been accidentally left inside the
able to operate the windows and glass roof. locked vehicle's cargo area after the tailgate is
closed, the tailgate will reopen slightly. The haz-
Comparison to standard remote controls ard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal
The indicated function can be operated by sounds.<
pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.
Windows and glass roof, electric
Instructions on opening and closing are found
starting on page 26. If the engine is switched off, you can still operate
the windows and glass sunroof so long as a door
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
or the tailgate has not been opened.
closing the windows or glass roof, the sys-
tem is checking whether a remote control is If the doors and tailgate are closed again and the
inside the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing remote control is located inside the vehicle, the
procedure, if necessary.< windows and the glass sunroof can be operated
again.
Unlocking Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to
be able to operate the windows or glass roof
when the engine is switched off and the doors
are open.
Switching on radio readiness

Switch on radio readiness by pressing the Start/
Stop button, page 48.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch;
otherwise, the engine will start.<
Press button 1.
Depending on the setting, refer to Unlocking Starting the engine
mode on page 27, only the driver's door or the The engine can be started or the ignition can be
entire vehicle is unlocked. switched on when a remote control is inside the
Press the button again to lock the vehicle vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
again.< control into the ignition lock, page 48.
Convenient opening with the remote control,

refer to page 28.
33
Switching off the engine in cars with Replacing the battery

automatic transmission The remote control for Comfort Access contains
The engine can only be switched off when the a battery that will need to be replaced from time
selector lever is in position P, page 50. to time.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever 1. Remove the cover.
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic

transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll. 2. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
Malfunction 3. Press the cover on to close.
Comfort Access may malfunction due to local Take the old battery to a recycling center
radio waves. or to your MINI dealer.<
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the
buttons on the remote control or using the inte-
grated key. Glass roof, electric
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
and start the engine. To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass roof and keep it in your
Warning lamps field of vision until it is shut.
Take the key with you when you leave the car;
The warning lamp lights up when an
otherwise, children could operate the roof and
attempt is made to start the engine: the
possibly injure themselves.<
engine cannot be started. The remote
control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunc-
tioning. Take the remote control with you inside
the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary,
insert another remote control into the ignition
lock.
The warning lamp lights up when the
engine is running: the remote control is
no longer inside the vehicle. After the
engine is switched off, the engine can only be
restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp lights up and a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote
control.
34
Tilting Windows
> Press the switch backward to the resistance
point and hold it there. To prevent injuries, exercise care when
Both glass roofs are tilted. closing the windows.
Releasing the switch stops the movement. Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
> With the ignition switched on, press the
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
switch backward beyond the resistance
selves.<
point.
Both closed roofs are tilted fully. If, after a window is opened and closed
Pressing again stops the movement. several times in close succession, the
window can only be closed and not opened, the
Opening, closing system is overheated. Let the system cool for
several minutes with the ignition switched on or
With the ignition switched on and the glass sun-
the engine running.<
roof tilted, press the switch backward and hold it
there.
Opening, closing
The front glass roof opens.
The rear glass roof is closed.
Front window
Releasing the switch stops the movement.
The glass roof can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch forward.
The front glass roof remains in a tilted position.
The rear glass roof is tilted. Pressing on the
switch again closes both roofs completely.
Convenience operation via door lock or Comfort
Access, refer to page 28, 29, 33.
Roller sunblind > Press the switch downward.

The roller sunblind can be opened and closed The window opens until you release the
independently of the glass roof. switch.
> Push the switch downward.
Following interruptions in electrical As of radio readiness, the windows will open
power supply automatically. Push the switch again to stop
After a power failure, there is a possibility that the opening movement.
the glass roof can only be tilted. In this case,
To open the window a crack, press the switch
have the system initialized. The manufacturer of
down twice in quick succession.
your MINI recommends that you have this work
done by your MINI dealer. The window can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch up.
35
Rear window Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the
windows, etc., prevents you from closing the
windows normally, the window can be closed
manually.
1. Press the switch upward and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch upward again within
> Press the switch downward. approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The
The window opens until you release the window closes without pinch protection.
switch.
> Push the switch downward. Safety switch
As of radio readiness, the windows will open
automatically. Push the switch again to stop
the opening movement.
The window can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch up.
After switching off the ignition

When the ignition is switched off, the windows
can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened. With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
Take the key with you when you leave the windows from being opened or closed via the
car; otherwise, children could operate the switches in the rear passenger area, by children,
electric windows and possibly injure them- for example.
selves.< Press the button, arrow.
The LED lights up when this safety feature is acti-
Pinch protection system vated.
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined Always press the safety switch when
threshold during closing, the system will stop children ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
moving the window prior to lowering it again trolled closing of the windows could lead to inju-
slightly. ries.<
Even though there is the pinch protection
system, always ensure that the window's
travel path is clear; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions,
such as thin objects, and the window would con-
tinue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.<
36
Adjustments CONTROLS
Adjustments
Vehicle equipment injuries can occur when the airbags are trig-
gered.<
In this chapter, all production, country, and Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
optional equipment that is offered in the model resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
range is described. Equipment is also described fully excluded, depending on the circumstances.
that is not available because of, for example, The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a
selected options or country version. This also mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individ-
applies to safety related functions and systems. uals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 78.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contri- Head restraint
bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
junction with the safety belts, the head restraints risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
and the airbags, the seated position has a major Adjust the head restraint in such a way
influence on your safety in the event of an acci- that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
dent. To ensure that the safety systems operate erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to event of an accident.<
observe the instructions contained in the follow-
Head restraints, refer to page 39.
ing section.
For additional information on transporting chil- Safety belt
dren safely, refer to page 44.
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
Airbags
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
Always maintain an adequate distance they do not represent a substitute.
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your Number of safety belts
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
Never allow more than one person to
minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
in the event of the airbag being deployed.
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
No one and nothing should come between the
lap.
airbags and the seat occupant.
Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
across the hips and does not press against the
front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure
abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against
that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g.
the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over
that no feet or legs are propped against the
hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the
dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if
safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap
the front airbag suddenly deployed.
and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
any twists. Otherwise, the belt could slide over
away from the side airbag and do not lean
the hips in the event of a frontal collision and
against the cover of the head airbag, otherwise
37
CONTROLS Adjustments
injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky cloth- Height

ing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body
area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could
be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 40.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly,
the vehicle is moving. The seat could arrows 1, until the desired height is reached.
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an Backrest
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 39 and on damaged safety belts
on page 42.
Pull lever, arrow 1, and apply weight to or
remove weight from the backrest as needed.
Seat adjustment, front
Observe the instructions on page 38 to Lumbar support
ensure the best possible personal protec- You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
tion.< to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
Longitudinal direction
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into the
desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly. Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur-
vature.
38
Seat adjustment, rear Height adjustment

Do not adjust rear seats while the vehicle
is moving; otherwise, passengers could be
injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the rear
seats engage properly. Otherwise the restrain-
ing effect of the safety belts during an accident
could be reduced.<
Longitudinal adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: Press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
Reinstall the head restraint before trans-
porting passengers, as otherwise the head
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the
restraint cannot provide its protective func-
desired position.
tion.<
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest
Adjustment of backrest angle, see page 102.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the Front
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident. 1. Pull up as far as it will go.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all 2. Fold the backrest back slightly.
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an 3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
increased risk of injury in an accident.< out as far as it will go.
4. Also press button 2 with a suitable tool and
Height
completely remove the head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
5. Fold back the backrest.
approximately at ear level.
39
Rear Safety belts

1. Pull up as far as it will go.
Observe the instructions on page 38 to
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
ensure the best possible personal protec-
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint tion.<
out completely.
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
4. Also press button 2 with a suitable tool and wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
completely remove the head restraint. safety belt as an additional safety device, but
5. Fold rear seat backrest back into position. they do not represent a substitute.
Front and rear seats

Seat heating
Closing
Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt
Switching on buckle.
Press once for each temperature level. The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature. any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
If you continue driving within the next erly, page 38.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature. Opening
The temperature is lowered or the heating is 1. Grasp the belt firmly.
switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the 2. Press the red button in the buckle.
battery.
The LEDs stay lit. 3. Guide the belt into its reel.
Switching off Height adjustment for rear safety belt

tongues
Press button longer.
When the outer rear seats are unoccupied, the
safety belt tongues can be slid back to the cargo
area trim panel with a clasp to prevent noise.
40
Back seat: center belt Opening

The belt buckle marked with the word CENTER is Press red button on small belt buckle 3 with belt
designed exclusively for the middle passenger. latch 1.
If the center safety belt is used in the back, the If the center belt is locked:
backrests must be locked, see page 103; other- Press red button 3 with the belt latch of the left
wise the safety belt will not have a restraining outside belt.
effect.
Buckle belt
Belt take-up on headliner
The take-up for the safety belt is on the head-
liner.
1 Opening for safety belt

2 Receptacle for small belt latch
Remove small belt latch from the take-up 3.
Guide both belt latches downwards.
Fastening
1 Large belt latch
2 Small belt latch
3 Small belt buckle
4 Large belt buckle
The belt latch 1 must be inserted into the belt
buckle 4. Make sure you hear the lock engage in
the belt buckle.
Insert the belt latch into the belt buckle so
Insert safety belt with small belt latch 2 into the that the safety belt is properly attached
small belt buckle 3. when a person is buckled in, and is not
twisted.<
41
Stowing away belt buckles Mirrors

If the center seat is not occupied, then insert the
belt buckles 3 and 4 into the corresponding Exterior mirrors
holders, arrows.
The mirror on the passenger's side is more
curved than the driver's mirror. The
objects seen in the mirror are closer than they
appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic
behind you on the basis of what you see in the
mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an
accident.<
Safety Belt Reminder
Front seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds. A message also
appears on the Control Display. Check
whether the safety belt has been fas- 1 Adjusting the left or right exterior mirror
tened correctly. The Safety Belt Reminder is 2 Tilting mirrors in and out
issued when the driver's safety belt has not been
fastened. The Safety Belt Reminder is also acti- Manual adjustment
vated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press
8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt has
the edge of the glass.
not been fastened, if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat, or if driver or front passen-
Tilting mirrors in and out
ger unfasten their safety belts.
Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in
Damage to safety belts direction 2. The mirrors can be folded in at road
speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed
in an accident: have the safety belt system This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for
and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the example, or for moving mirrors that were folded
belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out in by hand back out into their correct positions.
only by a MINI dealer or by a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor- Automatic heating
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu- At external temperatures below a certain limit,
facturer; otherwise, correct operation of these both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
safety systems is not ensured.< while the engine is running or the ignition
switched on.
42
Interior rearview mirror Steering wheel

Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when

you are driving at night:
Turn the knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,

automatic dimming feature
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
distance and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
It is controlled by two photosensors:
> Inside the interior rearview mirror, arrow.
> On the back of the mirror.
For proper function:
> Keep the photosensors clean.
> Do not cover the area between the interior
rearview mirror and the windshield.
> Do not place stickers or decals on the wind-
shield in front of the mirror.
43
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment For more information on automatic deactivation

of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 79.
range is described. Equipment is also described Child restraint systems,
installation
applies to safety related functions and systems. Before installing a child restraint system on the
rear seats, move the seat as far back as possible.
5-seater: Adjust the inclination of the center
The right place for backrest to the respective outer backrest.
children After the child restraint system has been
installed on the respective rear seat, move the
Do not leave children unattended in the
backrest forward so that the it rests lightly
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
against the child restraint system, refer to Rear
themselves and/or other persons by opening the
seat backrests on page 102.
doors, for example.<
Observe the child restraint system manu-
Children should always sit in the rear facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Accident research has shown that the safest
Otherwise, the protective effect may be dimin-
place for children is on the rear seat.
ished.<
Only transport children under the age of
13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear On the front passenger seat
in a child restraint system suitable for their age,
After installing a child restraint system on
weight and size. Otherwise, there is an
the front passenger seat, make sure that
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
the front, side, and knee airbags for the front
dent.<
passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is appro- Seat position
priate for their age, size and weight.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
Exception for front passenger seat
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
Front passenger airbags
this.
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti-
vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if
the child is seated in a child restraint system.<
44
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Child seat security Anchor points for LATCH anchors

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be prevented from being
pulled out in order to secure child restraint sys-
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
tems.
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
Locking the safety belt Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
are properly engaged and that the child
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
belt.
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out. the seat may be compromised.<
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system. Child restraint system with tether strap
The safety belt is locked. Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child restraint systems only; otherwise, the
Unlocking the safety belt anchors could be damaged.<
1. Open the belt buckle.
4-seater
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
Center belt: unlocking additional belt buckle
3, see page 41.
Guide safety belt to the take-up on the
headliner.
LATCH child restraint The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows,
fixing system are located behind the back of the rear seats.
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

To install and use the LATCH child restraint
system, follow the operating and safety
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
system; otherwise, the protective function of the
seat may be compromised.<
45
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
5-seater Center seat:
The child restraint anchor fittings for the two 1 Forward driving direction
outer seats, see arrows, are located behind the
2 Head rest
back of the rear seats.
The child restraint anchor fitting for the center 3 Attaching clip
seat is located under the luggage-compartment 4 Child restraint anchor fitting
sill, position 4 in picture center seat. 5 Load area floor
6 Seat back
Placement of the tether strap
7 Strap of the child restraint system
Make sure the upper tether strap does not
run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
Attaching upper tether strap to the
will not properly secure the child restraint sys-
attachment point
tem in the event of an accident.< 1. Slide the head restraint upward.
Outer seats: 2. Center seat: fold the load area floor back-
wards
3. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint holders.
4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
6. Pull the tether strap tight.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rear cargo well
4 Tether strap hook
5 Anchor
6 Seat backrest
7 Tether strap of the child restraint system
46
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Securing doors and

windows
Rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows

The rear power windows are blocked and can-
not be operated from the rear. Press safety
switch, refer to page 36.
47
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle equipment Start/Stop button

Ignition lock
Press the Start/Stop button to switch radio readi-
Inserting the key into the ignition lock ness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress
Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock. the brake or clutch while doing so.
Radio readiness If the Start/Stop button is pressed while
Individual electrical consumers can operate. the clutch is depressed in the manual
transmission or the brake pedal is depressed in
Removing the key from the ignition lock the automatic transmission, the engine starts.<
Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.
At the same time: Radio readiness
> The ignition is switched off if it was on Individual electrical consumers can operate. The
beforehand. time and external temperature are displayed in
the tachometer.
Automatic transmission Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
The key can only be removed if the selector lever > When the key is removed from the ignition
is in position P: interlock. lock
> When using Comfort Access by pressing the
button on the door handle or the but-
ton on the remote control, refer to Locking
on page 33
> After a certain has elapsed
Ignition on
Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator
area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths of
time.
When the engine is off, switch off the igni-
tion and any unnecessary electrical con-
sumers in order to preserve the battery.<
48
Driving CONTROLS
Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps in the displays
go out.
The ignition switches off automatically if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
The ignition is not switched off in situations such
as the following:
> The clutch or brake is depressed
> The low beams are switched on Manual transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 32.
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake.
Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed 2. Depress the clutch.

areas; otherwise, inhalation of the noxious 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
exhaust gases can lead to loss of consciousness
and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- Automatic transmission
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com-
gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the fort Access, refer to page 32.
engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car while the engine is run- 2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.
ning, place the transmission in neutral or move 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
the selector lever to position P and forcefully The starter operates automatically for a certain
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from time, and stops automatically as soon as the
moving.< engine has started.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is Switching off the engine
not burned or inadequately burned and there is
a danger of overheating and damaging the cat- Always take the key with you when you
alytic converter.< leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle
at a standstill. Move off immediately at a moder- fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.
ate engine speed. Secure the vehicle on steep upward and down-
ward slopes, for example, turn the steering
When starting the engine, do not depress the wheel towards the curb.<
accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
49
CONTROLS Driving
Automatic transmission lever. Otherwise, excessive force could lead to

1. With the car at a stop, move the selector over-braking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing,
lever to position P. at the rear axle.<
2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake. Manual transmission
Before driving into a car wash
By following these steps, the vehicle is able to
roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort
Access, in the ignition lock.
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
Parking brake the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels. Reverse gear
In addition, follow the instructions on page 49 Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
under Switching off the engine. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Automatic transmission
Releasing with Steptronic
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 51.
Parking the vehicle

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
select position P and apply the parking
brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running.<
Pull upward slightly, press the button, arrow, Removing the key
and guide the lever down. To remove the key from the ignition lock, first
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake move the selector lever into position P and then
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the key
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con- from the ignition lock, refer to page 48.
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
50
Driving CONTROLS
Selector lever positions P Park

P R N D M/S + – Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The front wheels are blocked.
Displays in the tachometer
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
Select this when you are in a car wash, for exam-
ple. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
P R N D DS M1 to M6 ward gears are selected automatically.
The selector lever position is displayed, or the Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
current gear in the manual mode. consumption is lowest when driving in
position D.
Changing selector lever positions
> The selector lever can only be moved out of Kickdown
position P when the ignition is switched on Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
or the engine is running. performance.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the throttle resistance point.
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock. Sport program and manual mode M/S
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
Overriding the selector lever lock
Move the selector lever from position D to the

left into the M/S shifting slot:
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played. This position is recommended for a per-
formance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Press the button on the front of the selector
lever, arrow.
51
CONTROLS Driving
Shifting with the selector lever Manually releasing the selector lever
Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to lock
activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts the Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
gear. position P even though the ignition is switched
> Pull the selector lever in the + direction. on, the brake is depressed and the button on the
Transmission shifts up. selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock
can be overridden:
> Push the selector lever in the – direction.
Transmission shifts down. 1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
The selected gear is displayed in the tachome- 2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
ter, e.g. M1. until the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the
cable connector if necessary.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when
they will result in a plausible combination of
engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a
downshift that would cause the engine to over-
rev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by
the current gear.
Shifting on the steering wheel 3. Insert extractor hook 1 into the loop on the
With the selector lever in position D, automatic passenger's side.
drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles The extractor hook is in the onboard
on the steering wheel. The transmission auto- document holder or in the pouch for
matically switches to manual mode. the tire-changing set, page 219.<
If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or 4. Pull the loop up.
accelerate for a certain amount of time, the
5. Move the selector lever into the desired
transmission automatically returns to D, auto-
position by pressing the button on the front
matic drive.
of the selector lever.
Before manually unlocking the selector
lever lock, firmly set the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.<
> Pull one of the shift paddles.

Transmission shifts up.
> Push one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts down.
M1 through M6 are displayed in the tachometer.
52
Driving CONTROLS
Turn signals/ The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
headlamp flasher
Wiper system
Do not turn on the wipers when they are
frozen; otherwise, the wiper blades and
the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.<
Do not use the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry; otherwise the wiper
blades may wear out faster or be damaged.<
1 Turn signal
2 Headlamp flasher
Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the resis-
tance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has 1 Switching on wipers
failed.< 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Signaling a turn briefly 3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or

rain sensor
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn. 4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Triple turn signal activation Switching on wipers

Press the lever as far as the resistance point. Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
You can set whether the turn signal flashes once The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
or three times. tion when released.
1. "Settings"
Normal wiper speed
2. "Lighting"
Press once.
3. "Triple turn signal" The system switches to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
53
CONTROLS Driving
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor 4. Press the button as often as necessary until
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the the symbol and "SET" are displayed.
intermittent-wipe time is preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain

sensor
Press button, arrow 3. 5. Press and hold the button until the display
This symbol is displayed in the tachom- changes.
eter.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering

an automatic car wash. Failure to do so
could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain

sensor
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi-
2. Press the button in the turn signal indicator tivity.
as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis-
7. Wait, or press and hold the button until the
played.
display changes.
The settings are stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain

sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Brief wipe
Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.
3. Press and hold the button until the display Cleaning windshield and headlamps
changes. Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
54
Driving CONTROLS
In cars equipped with an alarm system, the Do not use the washers when the washer
headlamps cannot be cleaned when the hood is fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will
open. damage the washer pump.<
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will
damage the washer pump. Washer fluid
Only use the washers if the hood has been com-
Washer fluid is flammable. Keep it away
pletely closed; otherwise, the headlamp washer
from ignition sources, only store it in the
system may be damaged. Do not use the wash-
closed, original container, and keep out of reach
ers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze
of children; otherwise, there is a danger of
on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be
injury. Comply with the instructions on the con-
obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze.<
tainer.<
Window washer nozzles
Washer fluid reservoir
The window washer nozzles are heated auto-
Only refill washer fluid that contains anti-
matically while the engine is running or the igni-
freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid
tion is switched on.
contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid
spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to per-
Rear window wiper
sonal safety.<
0 Rear wipers parked

1 To switch on intermittent wipe : Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
Turn the cap to level 1. antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
Operation is continuous in reverse gear. mendations.
The rear wiper does not move if the cap is in Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
interval stage 1 before the ignition is switched the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
on. the correct concentration is maintained.<
Cleaning the rear window Capacity

2 To clean the rear window during intermit- Approx. 4.2 US quarts/4 liters.
tent wipe :
Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold it
there.
3 To clean the rear window when wipers are
parked :
Turn the cap to level 3 and hold it there.
55
CONTROLS Driving
Cruise control Activating/deactivating cruise control

Press button 2.
The concept The system is automatically deactivated if:
Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at > Braking takes place
least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then
> The clutch is engaged
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the button on the steering wheel. > The transmission is set on N
Do not use cruise control when driving at > The stability control system is on
constant speed is prevented by adverse Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose con- again and maintained.
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident as a The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
result.< switched off.
Activating Maintaining current speed

Depending on the features with which your Press button 3.
vehicle is equipped, you have one of the two
The system maintains and stores the current
buttons indicated 2 in your vehicle.
vehicle speed.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect
is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be
exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may
drop if the engine output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached. Every time you press the but-
ton, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph or
1 Resuming cruise control 1 km/h.
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
Accelerating using the button
3 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
Press and hold button 3.
4 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up. The
accelerator pedal. After the button is released,
cruise control system is ready and can be acti-
the driving speed is maintained and stored.
vated.
Decreasing speed
Press button 4 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
56
Driving CONTROLS
Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Press button 1.
The last speed stored is achieved again and
maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display on tachometer
Selected speed is displayed briefly.

If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly in
the tachometer, the conditions necessary
for operation may not be fulfilled.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up if the system fails. A message
appears on the Control Display.
57
CONTROLS Controls overview
Controls overview
Vehicle equipment If the range displayed is less than

30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
In this chapter, all production, country, and wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
optional equipment that is offered in the model damage may occur.<
range is described. Equipment is also described With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner-
that is not available because of, for example, ing, engine functions are not always assured.
Tachometer
Fuel gauge
Never operate the engine with the needle in the

red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range,
Fuel tank capacity the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
Approx. 12.4 US gal/47 liters. engine.
You will find information on refueling on
Displays in tachometer
page 192.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
The arrow next to the gas pump symbol of the
fuel gauge points toward the side of the vehicle
with the fuel filler flap.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone
1 Current vehicle speed
of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters the remaining LEDs
change from orange to red, arrow, and a mes- 2 Odometer in kilometers, trip recorder,
sage is displayed briefly on the Control Display. external temperature, time
The tachometer displays the remaining cruising 3 Resetting the trip odometer
range. When the range is less than approx.
Press button on turn signal indicator to call up
30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the
information in the display area 2.
Control Display.
58
Controls overview CONTROLS
The following information is displayed sequen- Computer

tially:
> Trip odometer Displays in the tachometer
> Time
> External temperature
Trip odometer
To display trip recorder:
Briefly press button 3.
Resetting the trip odometer:
While the trip recorder is displayed and the igni-
tion is switched on, press button 3.
Press the button in the turn signal lever repeat-
Time edly to call up various items of information.
To set time, see page 64. The following information is displayed sequen-
tially:
External temperature, external > Cruising range
temperature warning > Average fuel consumption
When the displayed temperature sinks to > Current fuel consumption
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
> Average speed
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice. To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
to Units of measure on page 62.
Even at temperatures above +377/+36
ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully,
e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the Cruising range
shade; otherwise, there is an increased accident Displays the estimated cruising range available
risk.< with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
Units of measure over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Select the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the If the range displayed is less than
external temperature, page 62. 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Average fuel consumption

Calculated for the time the engine has been run-
ning.
With the trip computer, page 60, you can have
the average fuel consumption for another trip
displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2 seconds.
59
Current fuel consumption Displays in the "Trip computer":

Displays the current fuel consumption to allow
you to see whether your current driving style is
conducive to fuel economy with minimum
exhaust emissions.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, page 60, you can have > Departure time
the average speed for another trip displayed.
> Trip duration
To reset average speed: press the button in the
> Trip distance
turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Both displays show:
Displays on the Control Display > Average fuel consumption and
1. "Vehicle Info" > Average speed.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
To reset the values for the average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the mes-
sage.
Resetting the trip computer

Displays in the "Onboard info": To reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information

Operating principle
Certain settings and information are only avail-
> Cruising range able when the ignition is switched on, the vehi-
> Distance from destination cle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.
> Probable arrival time when a destination has
been input into the navigation system,
page 114.
60
Exiting displays
1 Button for:
> Selecting display 1. Press the button in the turn signal lever
repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
> Setting values
2. Press the button for a longer period.
> Confirming selected display or set values
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
> Calling up computer information 59
for approx. 8 seconds.
Symbol Function
Next setting or item of information
Adjusting rain sensor 54
Calling up Check
Control 65
1. While in a setting or information item, press

the button in the turn signal indicator
repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
Displaying vehicle
check 66 2. Press the button for a longer period.
The display changes directly to the next setting
or item of information.
Exiting the menu
61
Units of measure Possible displays
To set the units of measure. The settings are

stored for the remote control currently in use,
refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
1 Button for selecting information
Symbol Function
Engine oil
3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.
Front brakes
Service requirements
Rear brakes
Road worthiness test

The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are briefly displayed
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be
read out from the remote control by your Vehicle check
MINI dealer.<
62
Required maintenance procedures and legally

Symbol Function
mandated inspections are displayed.
Brake fluid You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select an entry and press the MINI joystick.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left. A list of
Exit display 61 selected maintenance schedules and, if
required, legally mandated inspections, is
shown.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
Next setting or item of
information 61 The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
More information on the MINI Maintenance Sys-
tem can be found on page 206.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections
More information
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
Detailed information on service always set correctly, page 65; otherwise, the
requirements effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is
not ensured.
You can have further information on the scope
of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis- 1. "Vehicle Info"
play, refer to page 16. 2. "Vehicle status"
1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Service required"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
63
4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 2. "Time/Date"
5. Open the deadline entry menu. 3. "Time:"

6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
Move the MINI joystick to the left.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
Clock
The system accepts the new time.
Setting the time
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the MINI
joystick.
The time format is stored.
64
Setting time zone Check Control

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" The concept
3. "Time zone:" The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired time
tems monitored. Check Control messages
zone is set and press the MINI joystick.
involve indicator and warning lamps in the dis-
The time zone is stored. play and, in some circumstances, an acoustic
signal as well as text messages at the bottom of
the Control Display.
Date
Indicator and warning lamps
Setting date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired day is
displayed and press the MINI joystick.
5. Create the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored. Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in the indicator
Setting the date format areas 1 and 2.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" Text messages
3. "Format:" Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplemental text messages

For most Check Control messages, you can view
more information later, e.g. regarding the cause
of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to
page 66.
4. Select the desired format.

currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
65
In urgent cases, this information will be shown 1. Press the button in the turn signal indicator
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up. as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis-
Exit display: played.
"OK" 2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Hiding Check Control messages
3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre-
sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" appear
in the display.
Press the button in the turn signal lever.

> Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
4. Press and hold the button.
They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc-
If there are no Check Control messages, then
tions occur at the same time, they are dis-
"CHECK OK" is displayed.
played in succession.
If a Check Control message has been stored,
>They are marked with the symbol the corresponding message is displayed. In
shown here. addition, the text message appears on the
> Other Check Control messages are automat- Control Display.
ically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but 5. Press the button to display any other mes-
remain stored. sages.
>They are marked with the symbol
shown here. Displaying on the onboard computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
The symbol indicates that Check Control mes-

sages have been stored. Check Control mes-
sages can be viewed whenever it is convenient.
Viewing stored Check Control messages 4. Select a text message.

Stored Check Control messages can only be dis-
played if the driver's door is closed.
66
Speed limit Activating/deactivating the limit

1. "Settings"
Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will
2. "Speed"
indicate when you reach this speed. This enables
you, for example, to receive warnings if you 3. "Warning"
exceed a speed limit in an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
1. "Settings"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.

The limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed" 2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"

The system adopts your current speed as the 4. Select the desired language.
limit.
67
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- 5. Press the MINI joystick.
rently in use. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
Setting the voice dialog the brightness control may not be clearly visible.
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-

ting is reached.
68
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
Technology for driving comfort and

safety
Vehicle equipment Acoustic signals

As the distance between vehicle and object
In this chapter, all production, country, and decreases, the intervals between the tones
optional equipment that is offered in the model become shorter. If the distance to the nearest
range is described. Equipment is also described object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a
that is not available because of, for example, continuous tone sounds.
If the distance remains constant, e.g. when driv-
ing parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal stops
after approx. 3 seconds.
Park Distance Control Malfunction

PDC Indicator lamp lights up. PDC has failed.
A message appears on the Control Dis-
The concept play. Have the system checked.
PDC assists you with parking in reverse. Acoustic To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
signals and a visual indicator warn you of the and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
presence of an object behind the vehicle. The they will continue to operate effectively. When
measurement is carried out by four ultrasonic using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the
sensors in the rear bumper. jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and
These sensors have a range of approx. only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning
does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/ PDC with visual warning
60 cm from the rear corner sensors or approx. To have the system show distances to objects on
5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors. PDC is the Control Display. The contours of distant
a parking aid that can indicate objects when objects are shown on the Control Display even
they are approached slowly, as is usually the before the acoustic signal sounds. The display
case when parking. Avoid approaching an appears on the Control Display as soon as the
object at high speed; otherwise, physical cir- transmission is shifted into reverse or the selec-
cumstances may lead to the system warning tor lever is moved into the R position.
being issued too late.<
System limitations
Automatic mode Even with PDC, final responsibility for esti-
With the engine running or the ignition switched mating the distance between the vehicle
on, the system is activated automatically after and any obstructions always remains with the
approx. 1 second when you engage reverse driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in which
gear or move the automatic transmission selec- objects cannot be detected. Moreover, ultra-
tor lever to position R. Wait this short period sonic detection can reach its physical limits with
before driving. objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings,
thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low
objects already indicated, such as curbs, may
69
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a force. Thus, the system helps keep braking dis-
continuous audible signal is given. Higher, pro- tance to a minimum. At the same time, all the
truding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be benefits provided by ABS are exploited.
detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously; Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or duration of the full braking application.
property damage. Loud sound sources outside
or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.< Dynamic Stability Control DSC
The concept
Driving stability control DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
systems traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate.
Your MINI has a number of systems that help to
DSC also detects unstable driving conditions
maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse
such as when the vehicle's rear end fishtails or
driving conditions.
the vehicle is sliding on its front wheels. In these
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
even with driving stability control systems. course within physical limits by reducing engine
An appropriate driving style always remains the output and through braking actions at the indi-
responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not vidual wheels.
reduce the additional safety margin by engaging
Every time that the engine is started, DSC is
in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of
ready to operate.
an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak-
ing. Safe steering response is maintained even
during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
Braking safely, refer to page 101.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine.
Cornering Brake Control CBC

Press the button until the DSC OFF indicator
Driving stability and steering characteristics are lamp on the speedometer is on and DSC OFF is
further enhanced while braking in turns or dur- displayed on the tachometer. DSC is deacti-
ing a lane change. vated. Stabilizing and propulsion promoting
actions are no longer executed.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free'
The system controls the brake pressure in the in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. brief period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
Brake Assist
as soon as possible.
Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system
to automatically develop maximum braking
70
Activating DSC Activating DTC

Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps
in the display elements go out.
For better control

The indicator lamp on the tachometer is
flashing:
DSC controls the driving and braking
forces.
The indicator lamp DSC OFF on the
speedometer is on and DSC OFF is dis- Press the button; the indicator lamp DSC OFF on
played on the tachometer: the speedometer comes on and TRACTION is
DSC is deactivated. displayed on the tachometer.
The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deacti-
vated; the Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated.
For better control

The indicator lamp on the tachometer is
flashing:
DTC controls the driving and braking
forces.
The indicator lamp on the speedometer
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is on and TRACTION is displayed on the
tachometer:
The concept DTC is activated.
DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized
for special road conditions such as uncleared
snowy roads. The system ensures maximum
propulsion though with restricted driving stabil-
ity. You therefore need to drive with suitable
caution.
In the following exceptional situations, it can be
useful to briefly activate DTC:
> When driving on snow-covered inclines, in
slush, or on uncleared snowy roads
> When rocking the vehicle free, driving out of
Deactivating DTC
deep snow or on loose surfaces Press button again, the indicator lamp DSC OFF
on the speedometer and TRACTION on the
> When driving with snow chains
tachometer go out.
71
Deactivating both DTC and DSC ALL4 all-wheel drive system

ALL4 is the all-wheel drive system of your MINI.
The combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further
optimize the traction and dynamic driving char-
acteristics. The ALL4 all-wheel drive system vari-
ably distributes the drive force to the front and
rear axle depending on the driving situation and
prevailing road conditions.
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-

Sport button
cator lamp DSC OFF on the speedometer comes Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond
on and DSC OFF is displayed on the tachometer. even more sportily.
The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and Dynamic
> Engine responds more spontaneously to
Stability Control DSC are both deactivated. There
movements of the accelerator.
will be no more stabilizing interventions.
> Steering response is more direct.
Interventions (differential lock) in braking occur
to improve propulsion when drive wheels are > Cooper S: the engine sounds more sporty in
rotating unevenly, even when DSC is deacti- coasting mode.
vated. With automatic transmission:
> More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the indicator lamps go Activating the system
out.
Hill Assist
Hill Assist aids you in comfortably driving off on
inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking
brake for this.
1. Hold the MINI with the brake.
2. Release the brake and immediately drive
off.
Hill Assist holds the car in place for approx. Press the button.
2 seconds after the brake is released. The LED lights up.
Depending on the load and gradient, the SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.
vehicle can roll backward slightly during
this period. After you release the brake, immedi- Deactivating the system
ately start driving since the Hill Assist only holds > Press the button again.
the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will start
> Switch off the engine.
to roll backward.<
72
Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ-
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre- The status is displayed.
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire. Initializing the system
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
Functional requirement tire pressures as reference values for the detec-
The system must have been initialized while the tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con-
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, firming the inflation pressures.
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Do not initialize the system when driving with
Initialize the system after every correction of the snow chains.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or 1. "Vehicle Info"
wheel change. 2. "Vehicle status"
System limitations 3. "Reset"

Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can-
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla-
tion pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in
the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration 6. Start to drive.
> Snow chains are attached The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
Status display When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be tinued automatically.<
displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or
not the FTM is active. Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
1. "Vehicle Info"
and red. A message appears on the
2. "Vehicle status" Control Display. An acoustic signal also
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" sounds.
73
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation 3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
pressure. sure in all four tires.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau- If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
maneuvers. been initialized. The system must then be
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with initialized.
normal tires or with run-flat tires. Possible driving distance with complete loss of
Run-flat tires, refer to page 200, are identi- tire inflation pressure:
fied by a circular symbol containing the let- The distance it is possible to drive depends on
ters RSC on the tire sidewall. the load and the stress on the vehicle while
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat driving.
tires, do not continue driving; continuing With an average load, it may be possible to drive
to drive can result in serious accidents.< for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability When driving with damaged tires, the handling
Control DSC is activated. characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
Actions in the event of a flat tire longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn-
Normal tires ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as
1. Identify the damaged tire. curbs, potholes, etc.
To do so, check the inflation pressure in all Since the possible driving distance depends to a
four tires. considerable degree on the strain exerted on
The inflation pressure display of the Mobility the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
Kit, page 216, can be used for this purpose. with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, exter-
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
initialized. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
If it is not possible to identify the damaged
change in the handling characteristics, e.g.
tire, contact your MINI dealer
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer
2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on braking distance and altered self-steering prop-
the damaged wheel, refer to page 216. erties.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
Run-flat tires indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop;
speeds up to 50 mph or 80 km/h. otherwise, pieces of tire may come off, which
could result in an accident. Do not continue
Continued driving with a flat tire driving and contact your MINI dealer.<
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or
80 km/h.
74
Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM
The concept
Measuring the inflation pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is
a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The status is displayed.
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli- Status indicator on the onboard
able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. computer
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to The tire and system condition is indicated by the
ensure that the system will operate properly. color of the tires.
Reset the system again after each correction of A change in the tire inflation pressure during
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or driving is taken into account.
wheel change.
A correction is only required when this is indi-
cated by the TPM.
System limitations
Sudden, serious tire damage caused by Green wheels
external influences cannot be indicated in The inflation pressure corresponds to the
advance.< desired state.
The system does not operate correctly if it has "TPM active" is displayed on the onboard com-
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be puter.
indicated despite correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat One wheel yellow
tire: There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
> If a wheel without TPM electronics is sure in the indicated tire.
mounted
All wheels yellow
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
devices with the same transmission fre-
pressure in one or more tires.
quency.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
Status display change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
can be displayed by the onboard computer, e.g. Gray wheels
whether or not the TPM is activated.
The system cannot detect a puncture.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Reasons for this may be:
2. "Vehicle status"
> TPM is being reset.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
> Interference from systems or devices with
the same transmission frequency.
> Malfunction.
75
Resetting system > The system was not reset after a wheel
Reset the system again after each correction of change and thus issues a warning based on
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or the inflation pressures initialized last.
wheel change. 1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
1. "Vehicle Info" tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. "Vehicle status"
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
3. "Reset"
normal tires or with run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 200, are identi-
fied by a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
4. Start the engine – do not drive away. 1. Identify the damaged tire.
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization. To do so, check the inflation pressure in all
6. Start to drive. four tires. The inflation pressure display of
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting the Mobility Kit, page 216, can be used for
TPM..." is displayed. this purpose.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
values to be monitored. The resetting process is have been reset. The system must then be
completed automatically as you drive. The tires reset.
are depicted in green on the Control Display and If it is not possible to identify the damaged
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again. tire, contact your MINI dealer.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When 2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on
driving resumes, resetting is continued auto- the damaged wheel, refer to page 216.
matically. The use of tire sealant, e.g. Mobility Kit, can
If a flat tire is detected while the system is damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
resetting, all tires on the Control Display case, have the electronics checked and
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" replaced if necessary at your earliest oppor-
is displayed.< tunity.
Message with low tire inflation pressure Run-flat tires

The warning lamps come on in yellow You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
and red. A message appears on the speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
onboard computer. An acoustic signal If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
also sounds. tires, do not continue driving; continuing
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss in tire to drive can result in serious accidents.<
pressure in the displayed tire.
76
Continued driving with a flat tire which could result in an accident. Do not con-
When driving with a damaged tire: tinue driving and contact your MINI dealer.<
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
Malfunction
vers.
The small warning lamp flashes in yel-
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or
low and then lights up continuously; the
80 km/h.
larger warning lamp lights up in yellow.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- On the onboard computer, the tires are
sure in all four tires. shown in gray and a message appears.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four No flat tire can be detected.
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
Display in the following situations:
have been reset. The system must then be
reset. > Wheel without TPM electronics is mounted:
If need be, have it checked by your MINI
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
dealer.
tire inflation pressure:
> Malfunction:
The distance it is possible to drive depends on
Have the system checked
the load and the stress on the vehicle while driv-
ing. > TPM was unable to complete the resetting
procedure; reset the system again.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km. The small warning lamp flashes in yel-
low and then lights up continuously; the
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
larger warning lamp lights up in yellow.
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
On the onboard computer, the tires are
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
shown in gray and a message appears.
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn- No flat tire can be detected.
ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as Display in the following situation:
curbs, potholes, etc. > Interference due to systems or devices that
Since the possible driving distance depends to a use the same radio frequency:
considerable degree on the strain exerted on The system automatically reactivates once it
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, is outside of the field of interference.
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, exter- Message for unsuccessful system reset
nal temperature, vehicle load, etc. Yellow warning lamp comes on. A mes-
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a sage appears on the onboard com-
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. puter.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a The system has detected a wheel change, but
change in the handling characteristics, e.g. has not yet been reset. It is not possible to pro-
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer vide a reliable warning about the current infla-
braking distance and altered self-steering prop- tion pressure.
erties.<
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can system, page 76.
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, pieces of tire may come off,
77
Declaration according to NHTSA/ ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
Systems driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
Each tire, including the spare, should be pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure tell-
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle tale illuminates.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
different size than the size indicated on the vehi- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you for approximately one minute and then remain
should determine the proper tire inflation pres- continuously lit. This sequence will continue
sure for those tires. As an added safety feature, upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres- malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
sure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
your tires are significantly underinflated. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale reasons, including the installation of replace-
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping continue to function properly.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the

marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Knee airbag
3 Side airbags in backrests
4 Head airbags at the front and rear
78
Protective action Otherwise, unprofessional attempts to service

Observe the instructions on page 37 to the system could lead to failure in an emergency
ensure the best possible personal protec- or undesired airbag activation, either of which
tion.< could result in personal injury.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and Warning notices and information about the air-
front passenger by responding to frontal bags can also be found on the sun visors.
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head Automatic deactivation of the front
and side airbags help provide protection in the passenger airbags
event of side impact. The relevant side airbag The presence of a passenger in the front passen-
supports the side upper body area. The head air ger seat is detected by measuring the resistance
bag supports the head. of the human body. The system correspondingly
The airbags are designed to not be triggered in activates or deactivates the front, side, and knee
every type of collision, e.g. not in minor acci- airbags for the front passenger.
dents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts. Make sure that the front passenger's feet
Do not apply adhesive materials to the remain in the footwell; otherwise, it is not
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or possible to guarantee the function of the front
modify them in any other way. passenger airbags.<
Keep the dashboard and window on the passen- The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
ger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it mirror shows the current status of the front pas-
with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
any holders such as for a navigation device or a Status of front passenger airbags below.
mobile phone.
Before transporting a child on the front
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
objects not specifically approved for seats with
tion and follow the instructions under Transport-
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
ing children safely, page 44.<
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
Malfunction of the automatic
not modify the individual components of the
deactivation
system or its wiring in any way. This includes the When teenagers and adults assume certain sit-
upholstery in the center of the steering wheel, ting positions, this can cause the front, side, and
on the instrument cluster, the doors, and the knee airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp
roof pillars as well as the sides of the headliner. for the front passenger airbags lights up when
Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the this occurs. In such cases, the passenger should
steering wheel.< change his or her sitting position so that the
front passenger airbags are activated and the
Do not touch the individual components
indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag
immediately after the system has been
status cannot be achieved by changing the sit-
triggered, because there is a danger of burns.
ting position, transport the relevant passenger
Have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal on a rear seat.
of airbag generators executed only by your MINI
> Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
dealer or a workshop that has the required
other items to the front passenger seat
explosives licenses.
unless they are specifically recommended
by the manufacturer of your MINI.
79
> Do not place items on the front passenger Operational readiness of airbag system
seat.
> Do not place items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below.
Status of front passenger airbags
As of radio readiness, page 48, the warning

lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire
airbag system and the belt tensioners are oper-
ational.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- Airbag system malfunction
bags shows the functional status of the front > The warning lamp does not come on when
passenger's front, side, and knee airbags in radio readiness is switched on.
accordance with whether and how the front > The warning lamp stays lit continuously.
passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
shows whether the front passenger airbags are
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
activated or deactivated.
there is the risk that the system will not function
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in as intended even if a severe accident occurs.<
a specially designated child restraint system
is properly detected on the seat or the seat is
unoccupied.
The front, side, and knee airbags for the
front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system. This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
installing a child seat, check that the indica-
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. It indicates that the child seat has
been detected and that the front passenger
airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front, side, and knee airbags for the
front passenger are activated.
80
Lamps CONTROLS
Lamps
Vehicle equipment The parking lamps will discharge the bat-

tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
In this chapter, all production, country, and unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
optional equipment that is offered in the model tery might not have enough power to start the
range is described. Equipment is also described engine.<
selected options or country version. This also Low beams
applies to safety related functions and systems. Turn the light switch to position 2.
The low beams come on when the ignition is on.
Parking lamps/low beams Automatic headlamp control

When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. Adaptive
Light Control is active.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun
is sitting low on a blue sky.
When driving into tunnels with bright overhead
lights, there may be a delay before the head-
lamps come on.
0 Lamps off / daytime running lights
The low beams remain switched on indepen-
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
dent of the ambient lighting conditions when
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps you switch on the fog lamps.
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run- If the daytime running lights are activated,
ning lights, welcome lamps, and Adaptive page 82, the low beams are always switched on
Light Control with the light switch in position 3 and the igni-
When you open the driver's door with the ignition on. The exterior lamps are automatically
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto- switched off after the vehicle is parked.
matically switched off if the light switch is in The automatic headlamp control cannot
position 0, 2 or 3. serve as a substitute for your personal
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch judgment in determining when the lamps
position 1. should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
Parking lamps cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
Turn the light switch to position 1. safety risks, you should respond to these kinds
The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is of low-visibility situations by switching the head-
switched on. lamps on manually.<
Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for

parking, page 83.
81
CONTROLS Lamps
Welcome lamps Switch on the parking lamps separately if

If you leave the light switch in the low beam or needed.
automatic headlamp control position when you
switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and Activating/deactivating daytime
interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon running lights
as the vehicle is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Pathway lighting 1. "Settings"
If you activate the headlamp flasher after 2. "Lighting"
switching off the ignition with the lamps
3. "Daytime running lamps"
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Setting the duration or deactivating the

function
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set a time of duration or deactivate the func- rently in use.
tion.
Adaptive Light Control

The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
rently in use. Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
Daytime running lights switch to position 3, refer to page 81.
The light switch can remain in the lamps off, Standstill function: To avoid blinding oncoming
parking lamps or automatic headlamp control traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not pivot
position. toward the driver's side when the vehicle is at a
In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is standstill.
automatically switched off after the vehicle is In reverse, the Adaptive Light Control is not acti-
parked. In the parking lamps position, the park- vated.
ing lamps will stay on after the ignition is
switched off.
82
Lamps CONTROLS
Malfunction Front fog lamps

A message is displayed.
The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
Press the button to switch the lamps on and off.
Front fog lamps

The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp lights up when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog
1 Turn signals/roadside parking lamps lamps are switched off when you activate the
headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
2 Switching on high beams
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for
parking. Comply with local regulations when Instrument lighting
doing so.
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
Switching on lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
After parking the vehicle, press and hold the beams are on.
lever up or down, arrow 1. The intensity of the brightness changes up to a
predetermined end point, and then decreases.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.
83
CONTROLS Lamps
Adjusting brightness
> Briefly press button: Brightness changes in
stages.
> Press and hold the button. Brightness
changes in a continuous manner.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, the entry
To switch the reading lamps on and off.
lamps, and the cargo area lamp are controlled
automatically. In the front: Press the switch.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a short In the rear: Press the button.
while after the ignition is switched off,
refer to Start/Stop button on page 48, all lights in Ambient lighting
the vehicle's passenger compartment are
switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting

can be changed.
> Press the switch forward.
The color changes in stages.
To switch the interior lamps on/off. > Press the switch toward the rear.
Press the switch. The brightness changes in stages.
To switch off the interior lamps permanently, Intermediate settings and colors are possible.
press the switch for about 3 seconds. For a continuous color change in the
ambient lighting, press and hold the
Reading lamps switch forward for longer than 10 seconds.<
Reading lamps are provided in the front and rear
adjacent to the interior lamps.
84
Climate CONTROLS
Climate
Vehicle equipment
Equipment versions Air vents

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, your 3 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
MINI contains an air conditioner or an automatic side windows
climate control. 4 Air to the upper body area, draft-free venti-
1 Air conditioner 86 lation
2 Automatic climate control 87 5 Air to the footwell
85
CONTROLS Climate
Air conditioner
1 Air flow rate 5 Rear window defroster

2 Cooling function 6 Air distribution
3 Recirculated-air mode 7 Windshield heating
4 Temperature
Air flow rate The cooling function helps prevent condensa-

Adjust the air flow rate. The higher the tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
rate, the more effective the heating or Depending on the weather, the windshield may
cooling will be. fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off To cool the air more quickly and intensely
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. when the external temperature is high,
you can switch on the recirculated-air mode.<
Switching the system on/off
Turn the air flow rate rotary switch to 0. Blower Recirculated-air mode
and air conditioner are completely switched off If the air outside the car has an
and the air supply is cut off. unpleasant odor or contains pollut-
Set any desired air flow rate to switch on the air ants, shut off the supply to the inte-
conditioner. rior of the car temporarily. The system then
recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
Cooling function If the windows fog in recirculated-air
mode, switch off the recirculated-air
Button Function mode and increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
When the cooling function over an extended period of time; otherwise, the
is on, the air is cooled, air quality in the passenger compartment will
dried, then reheated deteriorate continuously.<
or according to the tempera-
ture setting. The passen- Temperature
ger compartment can Turn upward, red, to increase the temper-
only be cooled while the ature.
engine is running. Turn downward, blue, to decrease the
temperature.
86
Climate CONTROLS
Rear window defroster Defrosting windows and removing

The defroster is switched off auto- condensation
matically after a certain time. 1. Set air flow rate to the maximum level.
The rear window heating is lowered 2. Set air distribution to position .
or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on Condensation is removed from the windows
the battery. more quickly when the cooling function is
also activated.
Air distribution 3. Set to the highest temperature, red.
Direct the flow of air to the 4. Deactivate recirculated-air mode.
windows , to the upper body
5. Turn on windshield heating if necessary.
area or to the footwell .
Intermediate settings are possible. 6. Turn on rear window defroster if necessary.
Windshield heating Microfilter

The windshield heating is switched The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
off automatically after a short time. microfilter is changed by your MINI dealer dur-
ing routine maintenance work.
The front window heating is low-
ered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain
on the battery.
Automatic climate control
1 Air flow rate, manual 6 Temperature

2 AUTO program 7 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
3 Recirculated-air mode sation
4 Maximum cooling 8 Cooling function
5 Air distribution, manual 9 Rear window defroster

10 Windshield heating
Comfortable interior climate select an interior temperature which is comfort-

AUTO program 2 offers the ideal air distribution able for you.
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer The following sections inform you in detail about
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is how to adjust the settings.
87
CONTROLS Climate
Most settings are stored for the remote control The recirculated-air mode should not be used
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile set- over an extended period of time; otherwise, the
tings on page 27. air quality in the passenger compartment will
deteriorate continuously.<
Air flow rate, manual
Press the – button to reduce air flow. Press Maximum cooling
the + button to increase it. You will receive maximally cooled
You can reactivate the automatic mode air as quickly as possible when the
for the air flow rate with the AUTO button. outside temperature is above
327/06 and while the engine is running.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The The automatic climate control goes into recircu-
display remains the same. lated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
Switching the system on/off upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
Reduce the air flow by pressing the – button
repeatedly until the system is switched off. All
Air distribution, manual
displays go out.
The flow of air is directed to the
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
windows, to the upper body area or
climate control back on.
to the footwell as selected.
AUTO program You can switch the automatic air

distribution back on by pressing the AUTO but-
The AUTO program adjusts the air
ton.
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, toward the upper body area and
Temperature
into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and
your temperature specifications will be adapted Set the desired temperature individually.
to outside influences in accordance with sea- The automatic climate control achieves
sonal changes, e.g. sunlight. this temperature as quickly as possible
The cooling function is automatically switched regardless of the season, using maximum
on along with the AUTO program. cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
The program is switched off if the air distribution
is manually adjusted or if the button is pressed If you switch between different tempera-
again. ture settings in quick succession, the auto-
matic climate control does not have enough
Recirculated-air mode time to achieve the set temperature.<
Recirculated-air mode: the supply

Rear window defroster
of outside air is permanently shut
off. The system then recirculates The defroster is switched off auto-
the air currently within the vehicle. matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equip-
If condensation starts to form on the
ment, the upper wires serve as an
inside window surfaces, press the AUTO
antenna and are not part of the rear window
button or switch off the recirculated-air mode
defroster.
and, if necessary, increase the air flow rate.
88
Climate CONTROLS
Defrosting windows and removing Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

condensation The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
Quickly removes ice and condensa- activated-charcoal filter provides additional pro-
tion from the windshield and front tection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
side windows. outside air. Your MINI dealer replaces this com-
For this purpose, also switch on the bined filter as a standard part of your scheduled
cooling function. maintenance.
The windshield heating is switched on automat- You can call up further information in the service
ically. requirements display, page 62.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating is switched Ventilation
off automatically after a certain
time.
Cooling function
Button Function
When the cooling function

is on, the air is cooled,
dried, then reheated
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
according to the tempera-
ture setting. The passen- 2 Jet for direction of air flow
or
ger compartment can
only be cooled while the Opening/closing
engine is running. Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow

Swivel the entire jet.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started. The
recirculated-air mode may be switched on auto-
matically.
When the AUTO button is pressed, the cooling
function switches on automatically.
89
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
Practical interior accessories
Vehicle equipment A list of compatible remote controls is available

on the Internet at www.homelink.com.
In this chapter, all production, country, and HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
optional equipment that is offered in the model Controls, Inc.
that is not available because of, for example, Operating elements on the rearview
selected options or country version. This also mirror
Integrated universal
remote control
The concept
By using the integrated universal remote con-
trol, up to 3 functions of remote controlled
devices, e.g., garage door openers or lighting 1 LED
systems, can be operated. As a result, the uni-
2 Memory buttons
versal remote control can replace up to 3 differ-
ent remote controls. To operate, the buttons on 3 Hand-held transmitter
the rearview mirror must be programmed with
the desired functions. For programming, the Programming
remote control for each device is needed.
General information
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte- 1. Switch on ignition.
grated universal remote control, always inspect 2. Initial startup:
the immediate area to make certain that no Press and hold the right and left buttons on
people, animals or objects are within the travel the rearview mirror for approx. 20 seconds
range of the device. until the LED on the rearview mirror starts
Comply also with the safety instructions supplied flashing quickly. All the programming for the
with the original hand-held transmitter.< buttons on the rearview mirror is deleted.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored 3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
functions as a safety precaution, page. distance of approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm
from the buttons on the rearview mirror. The
Checking compatibility required distance depends on the hand-
Depending on your vehicle's equip- held transmitter.
ment, the glove compartment can be 4. Press both the desired function on the
ventilated and, if the cooling function is remote and the button to be programmed
switched on, can also be cooled. on the rearview mirror at the same time. The
For additional information, please contact your LED flashes slowly at first.
MINI dealer or call: 1-800-355-3515.
90
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release Synchronizing:

both buttons. The quick flashing indicates 1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
that the button on the rearview mirror has remote-controlled device.
been programmed.
Do not exceed the 164 ft/50 m range of the
If the LED does not flash rapidly after remote-controlled device.
approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
2. Program the particular button on the rear-
between the rearview mirror and hand-held
view mirrors as described.
transmitter and repeat this step. Several
attempts at different distances may be nec- 3. Find and press the button for synchronizing
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds before each the device to be set. There remain approx.
attempt. 30 seconds for the next step.
Canada: If the programming was inter- 4. Press and hold the programmed button on
rupted by the hand-held transmitter, press the rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds
and hold the memory button and press the and then release. Repeat this step, possibly
button on the hand-held transmitter for up to three times, to complete the synchro-
2 seconds and release several times. nization. After the synchronization is com-
pleted, the programmed function is imple-
6. To program other functions on other but-
mented.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
You can operate the system with the engine To reprogram individual buttons
running or with the ignition switched on.
1. Switch on ignition.
Special features of hopping-code 2. Press and hold the button to be pro-
transmitter systems grammed on the rearview mirror.
If the device cannot be operated after being 3. As soon as the LED on the rearview mirror
programmed repeatedly, then check if the starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
device to be operated is equipped with a hop- transmitter of the device to be operated
ping-code system. In addition, check in the approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm from the
operating instructions for the device or press the buttons on the rearview mirror. The required
programmed button on the rearview mirror for a distance depends on the hand-held trans-
longer period of time. If the LED on the rearview mitter.
mirror first flashes quickly and then is on for 2 4. Press and also hold the button with the
seconds, then the device is equipped with a desired function on the hand-held transmit-
hopping-code system. The flashing and the LED ter.
being on repeats itself for approx. 20 seconds. 5. As soon as the LED on the rearview mirror
In addition, for devices with hopping-code sys- starts blinking faster, release both buttons.
tems, the integrated universal remote control The quick flashing indicates that the button
and the device must be synchronized. on the rearview mirror has been pro-
Information about synchronizing can be found grammed. The device can now be operated
in the operating instructions for the device to be using the button on the rearview mirror.
set. Canada: If the LED is not flashing rapidly
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec- after 60 seconds, change the distance and
ond person. repeat the step or, if the programming was
interrupted by the hand-held transmitter,
press and hold the memory button and
91
press the button on the hand-held transmit- Operating principle

ter for 2 seconds and release several times. By pressing the setting button with a thin, sharp
object, e.g., a pen or a similar object, various
Operation functions can be called up. The following setting
Before using the integrated universal options are displayed one after the other,
remote control, always inspect the imme- depending on how long the setting button is
diate area to make certain that no people, ani- pressed down:
mals or objects are within the travel range of the > Quick press: display switches on/off
device.
> 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting
Comply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.< > 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration
The device, for example a garage door, can be > 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand drive setting
operated while the engine is running or when > 12 to 15 seconds: setting the language
the ignition is on by using the button on the
rearview mirror. In addition, while within the Setting the compass zones
reception range of the device, press the button Set the appropriate compass zone on your vehi-
until the function is deleted. The LED on the cle so that the compass operates properly; see
rearview mirror is constantly on while the signal world map with compass zones.
is being transmitted.
To set the compass zones, press the setting but-
ton for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the
Deleting stored functions
compass zones that have been set are shown on
Press and hold the right and left buttons on the the display.
rearview mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the
LED on the rearview mirror starts flashing To change the zone setting, quickly press the
quickly. All stored functions are deleted. The setting button as often as necessary until the
functions can not be deleted individually. number of the compass zone for your location is
displayed.
The compass is again ready to use after approx.
Digital compass 10 seconds.
1 Setting button on the back of the mirror

2 Display
The cardinal or ordinal direction in which the
vehicle is moving is shown on the display.
92
Calibrating the digital compass Setting right/left-hand drive

The digital compass must be calibrated in the Your digital compass is already set to right-hand
following situations: drive or left-hand drive at the factory, depend-
> The incorrect cardinal direction is displayed. ing upon your vehicle.
> The direction that is displayed does not

Setting the language
change even though the driving direction
changes. You can set the language on the display:
> Not all cardinal directions are displayed. Press the setting button for approx. 12-
13seconds. Briefly press the setting button again
Procedure to switch between English "E" and German "O".
1. Make sure that there are no large metal The setting is automatically stored after approx.
objects or overhead power lines near your 10 seconds.
vehicle, and that you have enough space to
drive in circles.
2. Set the compass zone that currently applies.
3. Press the setting button approx. 6-7 seconds
to call up C. Then drive in a complete circle at
a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the calibration is successful, the C will be
replaced by the directions.
93
Glove compartment Closing

Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the
Opening arrow until it is in the vertical position.
Depending on the temperature setting of the air
conditioner or the automatic climate control,
high temperatures may result in the glove com-
partment.
USB interface for data transfer

Connection for importing data from a USB stor-
age device, e.g. software update, refer to
page 153.
Pull the handle to open the cover. The USB interface is located in the upper region
The light in the glove compartment comes on. of the glove compartment.
Observe the following when connecting:
Closing > Do not use force when plugging the connec-
Fold cover up. tor into the USB audio interface.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci- > Do not connect devices such as fans or
dent, close the glove compartment after lamps to the USB interface.
use while the vehicle is being driven.< > Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
Ventilation
external devices.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the
cooling function is switched on, can also be
cooled.
Connection for external
audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over
the vehicle's speaker system, refer to the Enter-
tainment chapter starting on page 146.
Center armrest
The center armrest between the front seats con-
Opening tains either a compartment or the cover for the
Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow. snap-in adapter, see page 167.
In the center armrest between the back seats,
there is a storage compartment.
94
Opening 2. Push to rear and swing down in front,

Press the button, arrow, and lift the cover. arrow 2.
3. Push center armrest in the base plate for-
ward.
4. Tighten handwheel by turning clockwise.
Ensure that the center armrest engages properly
when it is installed; otherwise, it may be dam-
aged, for example, during braking maneuvers.
Storage compartments
Center armrest rear Do not put any unsecured objects into the
interior of the vehicle; otherwise these
Removing may endanger the occupants, e.g., during brak-
The center armrest in the rear can be removed ing and evasive maneuvers.<
to increase the amount of storage room.
Do not use the instrument panel as a shelf,
1. Turn handwheel counterclockwise until it for example with non-slip mats; other-
reaches the stop, arrow 1. wise, it could be damaged.<
In the vehicle interior

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find storage compartments in the front and
rear doors and in the center console.
Pockets are provided on the backrest rear pan-
els of the front seats.
Center Rail
2. Push center armrest in the base plate gently On the Center Rail, a variety of accessories can
towards the back, arrow 2. be fastened to a special base plate and moved
to various positions, e.g. a cupholder or a mobile
3. Raise the armrest in front and swing out. phone holder.
Do not use accessory parts near the hand
Installing
brake; otherwise these could be damaged
1. Insert center armrest in the back into the when the hand brake lever is operated.<
rear recess of the base plate, arrow 1.
On the rail: Cupholder
Only install and move the cupholder in the rear,
between the rear seats.
95
Inserting base plate Make sure that the lever 6 is situated

The lever 3 can be locked in three positions. opposite the mount 4.<
On the rail: Smartphone holder

The upper part of the smartphone holder can be
rotated by 360°.
When installing in the front of the rail, ensure
that there is sufficient space, e.g., away from the
seat; otherwise, damage may be caused when
rotating.
1. Pull the lever 1 up to unlock the mounts.
0 Locking
1 Sliding along the rail
2 Inserting base plate
For inserting, move the lever into position 2.
Sliding and locking

1. Push lever 3 into position 1.
2. Slide the base plate.
3. Push the lever 3 down, into position 0, and 2. First install the smartphone on the Center
lock the base plate in place. Rail with the mounts 2.
Lock the base plate in place before driv- 3. To secure, push lever 1 down.
ing; otherwise, injuries may result in the
event of an accident.< Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
Installing cupholder the rear passenger compartment.
1. Lock base plate in place if necessary, refer to Items of clothing hung from the hooks
Sliding and locking. must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not
2. Pull the lever 6 up to unlock the mounts. hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise,
they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in
case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
In the cargo area

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
have the following storage options:
> Storage compartment under the flat load
floor
> Bag holder on the support for the cargo area
3. First insert the cupholder into the front cover
mounts 4 and then snap it into the rear
mounts 5.
96
Cupholders and ashtray Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by

the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the key so
that children cannot operate the cigarette
lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your MINI, when the engine is running or if the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
Cupholders
devices such as flashlights, car vacuum cleaners,
Use lightweight, nonbreakable containers etc., up to approx. 140 watts at 12 volts, as long
and do not transport hot beverages. Oth- as one of the following sockets is available.
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
event of an accident.< insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not push unsuitable containers forcibly
into the cupholder. Otherwise, you may Cigarette lighter socket
damage it.< Remove the lighter or cover from the socket.
Additional cupholders can be attached to the
Sockets
Center Rail in the rear passenger compartment.
In the rear passenger compartment
Ashtray
The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in
the center console.
Emptying
Remove the entire ashtray.
Lighter
Pull out the cover.
In the cargo area
With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Pull out the cover.
97
Drive Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of
In this chapter, all production, country, and approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
optional equipment that is offered in the model contact and wear patterns between brake pads
range is described. Equipment is also described and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
that is not available because of, for example, period.
applies to safety related functions and systems. Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
Break-in period 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to engage the clutch gently.
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and Following part replacement
economy of operation for your vehicle. The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
Engine and differential above have to be renewed in the course of the
Always obey all official speed limits. vehicle's operating life.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
General driving notes
not exceed the following:
Closing tailgate
> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h Only drive with the tailgate closed. Failure
to do so may endanger passengers or
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
other road users or may damage the vehicle in
transmission's kickdown mode.
the event of an accident or a braking and eva-
sive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
flow into the passenger compartment.<
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-
increased.
essary to drive with the tailgate open:
Tires 1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

Due to technical factors associated with their 2. Switch off recirculated-air mode and switch
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- the airflow control of the air conditioner or
tion potential until after an initial break-in automatic climate control to high, refer to
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the page 86 or 88.
first 200 miles/300 km.
100
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Hot exhaust system vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you

As in all vehicles, extremely high tempera- can still avoid possible obstacles with a mini-
tures are generated on the exhaust sys- mum of steering effort.
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys- the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that
tem, and never apply undercoating to them. ABS is functioning properly.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact between Objects in the movement range of the
the hot exhaust system and any highly flamma- pedals
ble materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of seri- out of the movement range of the pedals;
ous personal injuries and property damage. Do otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, pedals during driving. Do not place additional
there is a risk of burns.< floor mats onto an existing one or onto other
objects. Only use floor mats that have been
Hydroplaning approved for the vehicle and can be appropri-
When driving on wet or slushy roads, ately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge securely fastened again after they have been
of water can form between tires and road sur- removed, e.g. for cleaning.<
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, can
cause partial or complete loss of tire contact Driving in wet conditions
with the road surface, so that the car cannot be When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
steered or braked properly.< exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure
tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread that this maneuver does not endanger other
depth on page 199. road users. The heat generated in this process
helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that.
Then full braking force will be immediately avail-
Driving through water
able when it is needed.
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only Hills
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
To prevent overheating and the resulting
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
transmission may be damaged.<
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
Parking brake on inclines light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
the clutch; use the parking brake. Other- even brake failure.<
wise, greater clutch wear will result.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
For information on driving off using Hill Assist, shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
refer to page 72. sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Downshift-
Braking safely ing in manual mode of the automatic transmis-
Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a sion, page 51.
situation which requires full braking, it is best to Never drive with the clutch held down,
brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the with the transmission in neutral or with
101
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine brak- Expanding cargo area
ing action will not be present or there will be no
power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Cargo area cover
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the Do not place any objects on the cover;
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be otherwise, they could endanger the car's
impaired.< occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving, or they may damage the cover.<
Corrosion on brake rotors When you open the tailgate, the roll-up cover is
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, raised.
during extended periods when the vehicle is not To load bulky luggage, the cover can be
used at all, and in operating conditions where removed.
brake applications are less frequent, there is an 1. Unhook the lift straps from the tailgate.
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
rearward out of the bracket, arrow 2.
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked

Condensation forms while the automatic climate Rear seat backrest
control is in operation, and then exits under the
Before folding down the rear seat back-
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
rests, ensure that the range of motion for
vehicle are therefore normal.
the backrests is unobstructed. Particularly with a
In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may folded down middle section, ensure that there is
continue to run for some time after the engine is no one within the range of motion of the back-
switched off. This will generate noise in the rest and that no one reaches into that region.
engine compartment. Otherwise, injury or damage can result.<
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
Cargo loading observe the safety belt information on
To avoid loading the tires beyond their page 40.<
approved carrying capacity, never over- 5 seater: The rear seat back is divided in the fol-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- lowing proportions: 40-20-40.
heating and increases the rate at which damage When the outer rear seat backs are folded
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can down, no one may sit in the middle posi-
assume the form of a sudden blowout.< tion.<
Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they If necessary, remove the third head restraint,
could damage the vehicle.< refer to Removing head restraints, page 39.
102
Open the center belt and insert in the take-up Cargo area privacy screen
on the headliner, see page 41. Between the cargo area and the rear seat back-
Expand the cargo area by raising the rear seat rest, there is a cargo area privacy screen. It can
backrests to a steeper angle. be folded down and used as a loading platform.
The backrests can be adjusted as needed in When the rear seat backrests are folded
10 stages between a comfort position and a down, do not fold the privacy screen
transport position or can be folded down. upright. In an accident, cargo could fold down
In the comfort position, the backrests are as far the privacy screen and damage it.<
back as possible; in the transport position, they
are in an approximately vertical position. Folding down the privacy screen
Before installing a child restraint system, 1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover,
observe the instructions starting on page 44. refer to page 102.
2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear,
arrow 1.
1. Hold on to the backrest near the top, for

example on the headrest, and pull on the
loop, arrow. 3. Release the locking mechanisms on the left
2. Lock backrest in the desired position or fold and right sides, arrows 2.
down. 4. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen
and guide it downward.
Folding the backrests back into position Do not exceed the maximum load of
When folding the backrest, ensure that the 330 lbs/150 kg of the privacy screen when
lock properly engages. Otherwise, for it is in folded down into the loading platform
example during braking and avoidance maneu- position; otherwise, damage may occur.<
vers, cargo can be thrown into the interior and
endanger the occupants.< Folding the privacy screen forward
If the rear seat backrests are positioned at 1. Fold down rear seat backrests.
a steeper angle, do not install child 2. Unlock privacy screen, see above.
restraint systems in the rear of the vehicle as
3. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen
their protective features may be ineffective.<
and guide it forward onto the folded-down
When backrests are folded back from the rear seat backrests.
folded-down position, they lock in the transport
position.
To set the desired backrest angle or a comfort-
able position, pull the loop forward and adjust
the backrest.
103
Removing Removing
1. Removing cargo area cover, page 102. If necessary, the load floor can be removed.
2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear 1. Fold load floor together.
and unlock it, refer to Folding the privacy 2. Pull the load floor back slightly out of the
screen forward. take-up.
3. Remove it from the guides on the cargo area 3. Then take it out toward the top.
floor, arrows, and remove the privacy
The folded together load floor can be placed into
screen.
the luggage compartment.
Cargo net
Ensure that the cargo net is firmly
attached; otherwise, injuries may occur.<
Before installing
1. Remove the pouch with the cargo net from
the storage compartment under the pull-out
floor panel in the cargo area.
Flat load floor 2. Remove the cargo net from the pouch, then
Do not exceed a maximum load of unroll and unfold it.
330 lbs/150 kg on the load floor; other- After use, fold the cargo net together, roll it
wise, damage may result.< back up in the same way, and place it in the
pouch so that it can be stowed under the
Access to the storage space floor panel again. When doing so, make sure
Under the load floor, there is storage space, e.g., that hooks and tensioning buckles do not
for the cargo net. rest against the rod elements.
1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, at the back 3. Unfold the cargo net until the rod elements
edge of the load floor. snap into place.
Installing behind the front seats
2. Lift up load floor behind and fold forwards,

arrow 2.
1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover.
Before closing the tailgate, put the load floor
2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
back on the cargo area floor.
Expanding cargo area.
104
3. Insert each cargo net mounting pin all the Determining cargo limit
way into its respective front mount in the
headliner, arrow 1, and push it forward.
4. Attach the hook, arrow 2, at the bottom of
each retaining strap to the respective eye on
the vehicle floor.
5. Lash the cargo net securely. To do so,
tighten the retaining straps at the tensioning
buckles.
Removing 1. Locate the following statement on your

When removing and stowing the cargo net, pro- vehicle's placard:
ceed in the reverse sequence. The combined weight of occupants
To fold closed, press the release button, arrow. and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX pounds or YYY
kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
Bag holders
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be four 150 lb- pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
Holders on the left and right side of the support cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
for the cargo area cover, arrow, e.g. for hanging in step 4.
shopping bags or storage bags. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
Only hang light shopping bags or suitable the load from your trailer will be transferred
items on the holders. Otherwise, this may to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
create a hazard due to flying objects, for exam- transporting a trailer to determine how this
ple in the event of braking and evasive maneu- may reduce the available cargo and luggage
vers. load capacity of your vehicle.
Transport heavy luggage only if it is appropri-
ately secured in the cargo area.<
105
Load
4-seater:
Securing cargo
5-seater:
> Secure smaller and lighter items using

retaining or draw straps.
The permissible load is the sum of the occu- > Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The and heavier objects are available at your
greater the weight of the occupants, the less MINI dealer.
cargo/luggage can be transported. > These cargo straps are fastened using eight
securing eyes.
Stowing cargo Two of them are located on the side wall,
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for- arrows 1, of the cargo area.
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the Two of them are located on the rear wall,
rear seat backrests. arrows 2, of the cargo area.
> Cover sharp edges and corners. To use the lower lashing eyes, raise or remove
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is the pull-out floor panel.
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the Comply with the information enclosed with the
respective opposite buckle. load-securing devices.
> Do not stack higher than the top edge of the Always position and secure the cargo as
backrests. described above, so that it cannot endan-
> Use the cargo net, refer to page 104. Ensure ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
that no objects can penetrate through the braking or swerves are necessary.
net. Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight and axle loads, page 230; otherwise, the
vehicle's operating safety is no longer assured
and the vehicle will not be in compliance with
the construction and use regulations.
106
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried Rear luggage rack

loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking, A special rear-mounted luggage rack is available
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu- as an optional accessory. It does not require a
pants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening trailer hitch.
points for the tether strap, page 45; they may Please comply with the precautions included
become damaged.< with the installation instructions.
Mounting points
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
A special rack system is available as an option for
your MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to
advise you. Comply with the installation instruc-
tions supplied with the rack system.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
The mounting points are located under the cov-
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
ers in the bumper.
on vehicle handling and steering response.
Remove the covers, refer to page 224.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads Loading rear luggage rack
when loading the rack. When loading, make sure that you do not
exceed the approved gross vehicle weight and
You can find more information under Weights in
axle loads.
the technical specifications.
You can find more information under Weights in
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
the technical specifications.
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom.
When loading, make sure that there is sufficient
space for the movement of the glass roof.
Saving fuel
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
General information
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip. Your vehicle incorporates numerous technolo-
gies for reducing fuel consumption and emis-
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and sions.
braking maneuvers, and take corners gently.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif-
ferent factors. Fuel consumption and environ-
mental pollution are affected by various actions,
the manner of driving and regular maintenance.
107
Remove unnecessary cargo Coasting

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. When approaching a red traffic light, take your
foot off the accelerator and let the car roll to a
Remove attached parts no longer in use stop in the highest gear possible.
Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerody- On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
namics and increase fuel consumption. accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suitable
gear.
Windowsclosing Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the
Open windows increase air resistance and vehicle is coasting.
therefore fuel consumption.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
Check tire inflation pressure regularly stops
Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
pressure at least twice a month and before start- periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
ing on a long trip. in traffic jams.
Low inflation pressure increases rolling resis-
tance and thus leads to greater fuel consump- Switch off any features that are not
tion and tire wear. currently required
Features such as air conditioning, seat heaters
Drive off immediately and the rear window defroster require a great
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the deal of energy and result in greater fuel con-
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right sumption, especially in city driving and during
away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the Stop & Go operation. For this reason, switch off
fastest way for the cold engine to reach its oper- these features if they are not really needed.
ating temperature.
Have the vehicle serviced
Think ahead while driving Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking by good economy and a long vehicle life. The man-
maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle ufacturer of your MINI recommends having the
driving ahead. vehicle serviced by a MINI dealer. Also note the
MINI Maintenance System, page 206.
Looking-ahead and smooth driving reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds

Driving on poor roads
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and Your MINI with ALL4 drive is at home on any
higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable type of street or road. It combines an all-wheel
engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high drive system with the advantages of a normal
engine speeds and shift up early. passenger car.
When you reach your desired traveling speed, Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other-
shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at wise the vehicle may be damaged.<
constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
108
When you are driving on poor roads, there are a After driving on poor roads, please observe the
few points which you should strictly observe for following points to maintain the driving safety of
your own safety, for that of your passengers, the vehicle:
and for the safety of the vehicle: > Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before > Clean mud, snow, ice, etc. from the wheels
beginning to drive and do not take risks and tires and check the tires for damage.
under any circumstances.
> Adapt your speed to road conditions. The
steeper and rougher the road surface is, the
lower the speed should be.
> When driving on very steep uphill or down-
hill grades, make sure in advance that the
engine oil and coolant levels are close to the
maximum mark, refer to page 203.
> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles
such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these
obstacles whenever possible.
> Make sure that the undercarriage does not
touch the ground, for example on hilltops
and bumpy roads. The ground clearance of
the vehicle is a maximum of approx. 6.0 in/
15 cm. Please note that the ground clear-
ance can vary depending on loading and the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
> Only drive through road surface water up to
a maximum water depth of 1 ft/30 cm and
only at walking speed; do not remain sta-
tionary.
> After driving through water at low speed,
lightly press the brake pedal several times to
dry the brakes and to prevent the braking
effect from being reduced by wetness.
> Depending on the condition of the surface, it
may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer
to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on
page 71.
> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress
the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the
driving stability control systems can distrib-
ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
109
Follow Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

NAVIGATION Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment Navigation data

Information on navigation data
range is described. Equipment is also described 1. "Navigation"
that is not available because of, for example, 2. Open "Options".
selected options or country version. This also 3. "Navigation system version"
Information about the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data

General information
The navigation system can determine the pre- General information
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel- Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide can be updated.
you to every entered destination. You may obtain current navigation data and the
Enter data only with the vehicle station- enabling code at your MINI dealer.
ary, and always give priority to the appli- Updating the data can take several hours,
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con- depending on the volume of data.
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
> Update data while driving to reduce the
and the instructions issued by the navigation
drain on the battery.
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle > The update is resumed automatically when
occupants and other road users in danger.< a trip is continued after an interruption.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
Selecting navigation system are available during updating.
1. "Navigation" > You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
> The medium with the navigation data can be
removed after the update.
During route guidance, an arrow view or a map

view is displayed on the onboard computer.
112
Navigation system NAVIGATION
To update
1. Insert USB storage device with navigation
data
> Into the USB interface in the glove com-
partment
> Into the USB audio interface.
2. Follow the instructions on the onboard com-
puter.
3. Enter the activation code of the USB storage
device.
4. Begin driving.
After you begin to drive, the system restarts and
updates the navigation data as you drive.
113
NAVIGATION Destination entry
Destination entry
General information The system also supports you with the following
features:
In entering your destination you can select from > If you do not enter a street, the system will
among the following options: guide you to the downtown area of a town
> Manual destination entry, see below or city.
> Selecting destination from address book, > You can skip the entry of country and town/
page 116 city if the current entries should be retained
> Last destinations, page 117 for your new destination.
> Special destinations, refer to page 118
Entering a state/province
> Entering the destination via map, refer to
1. "Navigation"
page 119
2. "Enter address"
> Selecting home address, refer to page 117
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.
> Entering destination via voice, page 120
After selecting your destination you can proceed Entering a town/city
to start the route guidance, page 123.
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed
city.
Manual destination
entry
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, you are supported with the word-
match principle, refer to page 122. This makes it
possible to enter different spellings and com-
pletes your entry automatically so that stored
town/city names and street names can be
accessed quickly. 2. Select letters, if necessary.
1. "Navigation" A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
2. "Enter address" ter appears on the Control Display.
To delete letters:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press the MINI joystick.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press and hold the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
114
Destination entry NAVIGATION
To enter spaces, if necessary: 4. Select the digits.

Select the symbol. 5. Change to the list of house numbers.
4. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the 6. Select a house number or range of house
right and change to the list of towns and cit- numbers.
ies and select a name.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
It is also possible to enter a street without enter-
ing a destination town/city. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, this
entry can be canceled. This may be practical if
the desired street does not exist in the entered
Entering the postal code destination, because, for example, it belongs to
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed another part of the town/city.
city.
1. "Navigation"
2. Select the symbol.
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the digits individually.
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
4. Change to the list of street names.
cities.
5. Select "In" with the currently displayed
5. Highlight the postal code.
country.
6. Select the zip code.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
Entering street and intersection

1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and intersection the same
way you entered the town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right to
change to the list of street names. 6. Select the letters.
2. Highlight street. 7. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the street. 8. Highlight street.
9. Select the street.
Alternative: Entering street and house
number
Starting route guidance after entering
1. Select "Street" or displayed street. the destination
2. Enter the street the same way you entered 1. "Accept destination"
the town/city.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
3. "House number" tion".
115
> Setting "Route preference", refer to page Storing a destination in the address
123. book
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to Store the destination in the address book after
page 118. entering the destination.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 165 or
page 181.
Selecting a destination from the address

book 6. Select an existing contact, if available.
1. "Navigation" 7. Select "Business address" or "Home
2. "Address book" address".
Contacts with addresses are displayed if 8. Enter "Last name" and "First name" if you
these addresses have been checked as des- wish.
tinations.
9. "Store in vehicle"
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they must Storing the position
first be checked as destinations, refer to Your current position can be stored in the
page 166 or page 182. address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,

using the "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
116
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist- Last destinations

ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name. The last destinations are stored automatically.
5. "Store in vehicle" These destinations can be called up and used as
a destination for route guidance.
Editing or deleting an address
Accessing last destinations
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
3. Select the destination.

4. "Start guidance"
Using home address as destination Editing a destination

The home address must be stored as a destina- Destinations can be edited, for example, to
tion. Refer to Defining a home address, change the house number of an existing entry.
page 165 or page 182. 1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"
2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the destination.
3. "Home" 4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
4. "Start guidance" tions".
117
Special destinations 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, it is possible
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a to select several category details. Move the
hotel or place of interest, and start route guid- MINI joystick to the left to exit category
ance to the corresponding location. details.
The scope of information provided 7. "Start search"
depends on the particular set of naviga- A list of the special destinations is displayed.
tion data you are using.<
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
Accessing search for special
destinations 9. Select the symbol.
1. "Navigation" 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
2. Select "Points of Interest" search.
If several details are stored, then you can scroll
A-Z search through the pages. If a phone number is avail-
able, a connection can be established, if desired.
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City" Special destination location
3. "Category" As you input the search destination, you can
4. "Category details" select from among various options.
For some special destinations, it is possible > "At current location"
to select several category details. Move the > "At destination"
MINI joystick to the left to exit category
> "At different location"
details.
> With active route guidance: "Along route"
5. "Keyword"
6. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select the special destination.
tion".
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection Starting the search for special
can be established, if desired. destinations
1. "Start search"
Category search
2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.
1. "Category search"
> "At current location"
2. "Search destination" The special destinations are displayed in
3. Select or enter town/city. order of their distance and are displayed
4. "Category" with a direction arrow pointing toward
the destination.
5. Select category.
118
> "At destination", "At different location", Entering the destination

"Along route"
The special destinations are displayed in via map
order of their distance from the search If you only know the location of a destination or
point. street, then you can enter the destination with
> Destinations of the selected category are the aid of the map.
displayed in the map display as symbols.
The display depends on the map scale Selecting the destination
and the category. 1. "Navigation"
3. Highlight special destination. 2. "Map"
4. Select the special destination. The map shows the current position of the
5. Select the symbol. vehicle.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- 3. "Interactive map"
tion".
The distance from the destination is displayed.
Displaying special destinations in the

map
To display symbols of the special destinations in
the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options". 4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
4. "Display Points of Interest" > Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
> Moving map: Move the MINI joystick in
the corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: Move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding direc-
tion and turn the MINI joystick.
5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or
"Add as another destination".
5. Select the settings. > "Find points of interest": The search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street

If the system does not detect any street, then a
street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of
the destination are displayed.
119
Additional functions Saying the entries

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted > Countries, towns/cities, streets, and inter-
and the visible map section can be shifted. You sections can be either spoken aloud as an
can also access other functions by pressing the entire words or spelled in the system lan-
MINI joystick: guage, refer to page 67.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language of the area is
different from the system language.
> Speak the letters smoothly and avoid exces-
sive emphasis and pauses.
Entering a town/city
> Select the symbol and "Start guid- The town/city can be spelled or entered as an
ance" if necessary. entire word.
> "Exit interactive map" The methods of entry depend on the nav-
> Map display igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
> "Display destination"
The section of the map around the desti- 1. {City} or {Spell city}.
nation is displayed. 2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/
> "Display current location" city.
The section of the map around the cur- 3. Say the name of the town/city or if neces-
rent position is displayed. sary, spell at least the first three letters.
> "Find points of interest", refer to 4. Select city/town:
page 118.
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
Entering destination via > Select other city/town: {New entry}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
voice
> Spell the entry: {Spell city}
General information
> Voice activation system, refer to page 21.
> When entering a destination by voice, it is
possible to switch between voice input and
the onboard computer.
> Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
120
Similar-sounding towns/cities that cannot Planning a trip with

be differentiated by the system are com-
piled in a separate list and displayed as a town/ intermediate
city followed by three dots. destinations
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.< New trip
The town/city can also be selected from the list Various intermediate destinations can be
via the onboard computer: entered for a trip. The trip destination must be
Turn the MINI joystick until the destination is entered first, refer to Destination input,
selected, and press the MINI joystick. page 114.
Entering a street or intersection Entering intermediate destinations

The street or intersection is entered in the same A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
way as the town/city. be entered for one trip.
1. "Navigation"
Entering house number
2. Select the type of destination entry and
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
enter the intermediate destination.
house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be
entered:
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
Starting route guidance

{Start guidance}
Route guidance starts immediately. 3. "Add as another destination"
Adding further intermediate

destinations
{Add as another destination}
Further intermediate destinations can be added.
Saving destination
The destination is automatically added to the list
of the last destinations.
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip

After entering all intermediate destinations:
"Start guidance"
121
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier to enter the names of towns or streets.
The system runs ongoing checks, comparing
your destination entries with the data stored in
the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The
user benefits include:
> Town/city names can also be entered differ-
ently from the official names if you use a
form that is customary in other countries.
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
122
Route guidance NAVIGATION
Route guidance
Starting route guidance > Route criteria can be changed during desti-
nation input and during route guidance.
1. "Navigation" > Street types are part of the navigation data
2. "Enter address" and are taken into account in route plan-
3. Select the destination. ning, e.g. avoiding highways.
4. "Accept destination" > The proposed route can differ from personal
experience.
5. "Start guidance"
> The settings are stored for the remote con-
> The route is displayed on the onboard com-
trol currently in use.
puter.
> Route guidance with traffic information,
> The distance to the destination/intermedi-
refer to page 129.
ate destination and the estimated time of
arrival are displayed in the map view.
Changing route criteria
> The arrow display is displayed on the
1. "Navigation"
onboard computer, if so desired.
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
Terminating route 4. Selecting a criterion:
guidance > "Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least possi-
In the arrow or map view ble distance and stretches of road that
1. "Navigation" allow rapid driving.
2. "Map" > "Efficient route": optimized combi-
nation of the fastest and shortest possi-
ble route.
4. "Stop guidance"
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
Continuing route > "Alternative routes": Suggestions of

additional alternate routes during route
guidance guidance.
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, route guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain criteria.
123
NAVIGATION Route guidance
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Lane information

Where possible, the selected criteria will be In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of
avoided on the route. multi-lane roads are each marked with a trian-
> "Avoid highways": avoid highways gle.
where possible. > Filled triangle: optimum lane.
> "Avoid toll roads": avoid toll roads where > Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can,
possible. however, also be possible to briefly make
> "Avoid ferries": avoid ferries where possi- additional lane changes.
ble.
The setting applies to the current route and to List of roads or towns/cities on the route
the planning of future routes. If the route guidance has been started, then you
If the route criteria "Avoid highways", can display a list of the roads and towns/cities on
"Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are the route. The distance to be traveled and traffic
selected, then this can prolong the calculation bulletins are displayed for each segment of the
time for the route.< route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
Route
There are various views of the route available
during route guidance:
> Arrow display
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 125
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
3. Highlight a section.
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel. Taking detours
> Street name of the currently traveled street. During route guidance, prompt the navigation
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of system to bypass certain route segments. In
direction. doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
> Intersection view.
1. "Navigation"
> Lane information.
> Traffic information.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
124
3. "New route for:" Map display

Displaying map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Overview
4. Turn the MINI joystick: enter the desired

mileage.
Resuming the original route

If the route section should no longer be
bypassed: 1 Toolbar
1. "Navigation" 2 Route segment with traffic obstruction
2. "Route information" 3 Road sign for traffic obstruction
3. "New route for:" 4 Planned route
4. "Remove blocking" 5 Current location
6 Upper status box
Recommended refueling
7 Lower status box
The remaining driving range is calculated, and
gas stations along the route are shown.
Lines on the map
Even with the latest navigation data, informa-
In the map view, streets and roads are depicted
tion on various points of interest may have
with different colors and lines according to their
changed, e.g., service stations may not be in
classification. Dotted lines represent railroad
operation.
and ferry connections. National borders are
1. "Navigation" depicted with thin lines.
3. "Recommended refuel" Traffic obstructions
A list of gas stations is displayed. Small triangles along the planned route identify
4. Select a gas station. route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the tri-
angles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
6. "Start guidance": The guidance to the
Road signs classify the obstructions.
selected gas station is started.
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
"Add as another destination": The gas sta-
planned route or direction of travel.
tion is included in the route.
125
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not Changing map scale
relate to the planned route or direction of "Interactive map"
travel.
> Moving map: Move the MINI joystick in the
Traffic information, refer to page 127. corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: Move the
Planned route
MINI joystick in the corresponding direction
After route guidance is started, the planned and turn the MINI joystick.
route is displayed on the map.
Changing scale
Status boxes
1. Select the symbol and press the MINI joy-
Show/hide: Press the MINI joystick. stick.
> Upper status box: Time, phone details, and 2. Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: Symbol for active route Automatic scaling of the map
guidance, traffic information status, arrival In the map view facing north, turn the
time, and distance from destination. MINI joystick in either direction until the scale
AUTO is displayed. The map shows the entire
Toolbar path between the location and destination..
The following functions are available directly in
the map view: Settings for the map display
Symbol Function currently in use.
Starting/stopping route 1. Open "Options".

guidance 2. "Settings"
> "Day/night mode"
Switching voice instruc- Select and adjust depending on light
tions on/off conditions. If "Traffic conditions/gray
map" is activated, then this setting is not
Changing route criteria or
taken into account.
selecting route alternatives
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Searching for special desti- The map is optimized for displaying traf-
nation fic bulletins. Symbols for the special des-
tinations are no longer displayed.
Displaying traffic bulletins
Displaying arrow view in map display
Interactive map
When route guidance is active, the arrow view
can be displayed additionally on the right side of
Adjusting map views
the map display.
or arrow display
1. "Navigation"
Changing scale 2. Open "Options".
126
3. "Arrow display on map" Adjusting volume for voice instructions

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to
select the desired volume.
Destination guidance via

voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
The voice instructions can be switched on and
This volume is independent of the volume of the
off during route guidance.
audio sources.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" rently in use.
Symbol Meaning Traffic information

Voice instructions switched
Overview
on
In many congested areas, you can receive traffic
Voice instructions switched information that is transmitted by radio stations.
off The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
Repeating a voice instruction
During route guidance, the traffic information
1. "Navigation" relevant to the route you are planning to take is
2. "Map" automatically shown and taken into account in
3. Highlight the symbol. route planning. Irrespective of whether route
guidance is active, you can have the traffic infor-
4. Press the MINI joystick twice.
mation displayed in the map display or as an
event list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if traffic information relates to the cal-
culated route.
127
Real Time Traffic Information End-User non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
Provisions pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or
Certain MINI models equipped with navigation usage of trade.
have the capability to display real-time traffic D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
information. If your system has this capability MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
the following additional terms and conditions special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
apply: damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
An End-User shall no longer have the right to use enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is to the same) arising from any claim relating
in material breach of the terms and conditions directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
contained herein. and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Chan-
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
nel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network")
including, without limitation, claims in contract
holds the rights to the traffic incident data and
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered.
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
quential damages, so those particular limita-
transmit or distribute in any way any portion of
tions may not apply to you.
traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify,
defend and hold harmless MINI of North Amer-
Switching reception of traffic
ica, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traffic Network,
information on/off
Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all
claims, damages, costs or other expenses that 1. "Navigation"
arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unau- 2. Open "Options".
thorized use of the traffic incident data or the 3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this
directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlaw- Accessing traffic information
ful activities by you in connection herewith.
1. "Navigation"
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
2. "Map"
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers "Traffic Info": traffic information for the sur-
make no representations about content, traffic rounding area is listed here. The symbol
and road conditions, route usability, or speed. turns red when traffic information relate to
the calculated route.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, 3. "Traffic Info"
including, but not limited to, any and all third First, traffic bulletins relating to the planned
party providers of any of the licensed material, route are displayed.
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit- The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of
ted by law, all warranties or representations with their distance from the current vehicle posi-
respect to the licensed material (including, with- tion.
out limitation, that the licensed material will be 4. Select traffic information.
error-free, will operate without interruption or "More information": Display additional
that the traffic data will be accurate), express, information.
implied or statutory, including, without limita- 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic informa-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, tion if desired.
128
Traffic bulletins in the map 4. "Traffic Info categories"

When the traffic info map is activated, the pic- 5. Select the desired categories.
ture on the Control Display is switched to a gray-
scale. This permits an optimized depiction of
traffic information. The day/night mode is disre-
garded in this setting. The symbols for the spe-
cial destinations are no longer displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map" Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
Symbols in map view > Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
The symbols of traffic obstructions are displayed are always displayed.
differently, depending on the scale of the map > For personal safety, traffic information that
and location of the traffic obstruction in relation indicates a potential hazard can not be hid-
to the route. den.
Additional information in the map Route guidance with traffic information

display
Depending on the map scale, the length, direc- General information
tion, and effects of a traffic obstruction are In semi-dynamic route guidance systems,
depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by bars detour suggestions by the navigation system
along the planned route. The colors displayed can be added manually. In dynamic route guid-
depend on the information sent by the traffic ance systems, they are automatically included in
information service. the route guidance.
> Red: traffic congestion
Semi-dynamic route guidance
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
With traffic information reception switched on,
> Yellow: heavy traffic
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
> Green: clear roads
The system takes into account the existing traffic
> Gray: general traffic information such as information during route guidance. A message is
road construction displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
The colors displayed depend on the information information, and the possible alternate routes.
sent by the traffic information service. When there are obstructions to traffic, an alter-
nate route is provided. The difference in dis-
Filtering of traffic bulletins tance and time between the original route and
To set which traffic bulletins the system should the alternate route are also displayed.
display: Taking an alternate route:
1. "Navigation" "Detour"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
129
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the road-

way, a message is displayed without a possible
alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic route guidance

The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system will not point out traffic obstruc-
tions on the original route.
> Traffic information will continue to be dis-
played on the map.
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
130
What to do if… NAVIGATION
What to do if…
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position. Recep-
tion is best when you have an unobstructed
view to the sky.
> The route guidance does not accept an
address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and start
route guidance.
> The route guidance does not accept a desti-
nation?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
Stored data do not contain the data of the
destination. Select a destination that is as
close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to
a grayscale. This permits an optimized
depiction of traffic information.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during route guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
> The navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
131
Rock Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

ENTERTAINMENT On/off and tone
On/off and tone
Vehicle equipment 4 Sound output for entertainment on/off,

volume
In this chapter, all production, country, and > Press: switch on/off.
optional equipment that is offered in the model When you switch on the unit, the radio
range is described. Equipment is also described station or track set most recently is
that is not available because of, for example, played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
5 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
General information > Selecting a track
The following audio sources have shared control 6 Ejecting CD
elements and setting options:
> Radio
Switching on/off
> CD player
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player Entertainment audio output
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> Onboard computer
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
Press the knob.
Buttons near the CD player
This symbol at the upper edge of the Control
Display indicates that the sound output is
switched off.
1 Drive for audio CDs

2 Selecting waveband
3 Changing the audio source
134
On/off and tone ENTERTAINMENT
Adjusting volume Adjustments

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
Turn the knob to the desired volume.

The volume can also be adjusted on the steering
3. Select the desired tone setting.
wheel, refer to page 10.
rently in use; refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Tone control
Various tone settings can be changed, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume con-
trol.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
4. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
once.
5. To store: Press the MINI joystick.
currently in use; refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
Volume levels
> "Speed volume": Volume is adapted
Treble, bass, balance, fader depending on the speed
> "Treble": treble adjustment. > "PDC": Volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Bass": bass adjustment.
> "Gong": Volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
> "Balance": volume distribution right/left.
for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder rela-
> "Fader": volume distribution front/back. tive to the entertainment sound output
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during
a phone conversation.
135
ENTERTAINMENT On/off and tone
Adjustments
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.

Resetting tone settings

All tone settings can be reset to the default
value.
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
136
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
Vehicle equipment 1. "Radio"

General information
2. "FM" or "AM"
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
3. Select the desired station.
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
> Satellite radio
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn and press the MINI joystick
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
Press the knob if the sound output is switched or

off. Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10.
Selecting a station manually

Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
137
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
4. Select the frequency: turn the MINI joystick. Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
To store the station: Press the MINI joystick.
Storing stations
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station. rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with improved sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
5. Select the desired memory location. Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Press and hold the MINI joystick to save a radio Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
station that appears in the list of stations, but is uity Digital Corp.
not being listened to.
The stations are stored for the remote control Activating/deactivating digital radio
currently in use. reception
1. "Radio"
RDS – Radio Data System 2. "FM" or "AM"
In the FM frequency range, additional informa- 3. Open "Options".
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
4. "HD Radio Reception"
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
or disrupted, it can take some time before the rently in use.
station names are displayed. This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
138
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
When setting a station with a digital signal, it

may be a few seconds until the station is repro-
duced in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information 4. Select the desired memory location.
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist. The list of stored stations is stored for the remote
2. Open "Options". Deleting a station
3. "Station info" 1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station 4. Open "Options".
name of the main station ends in HD1. The sta- 5. "Delete entry"
tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3,
etc.
1. Select the desired station. Satellite radio
General information
3. Select the substation.
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
Packages must be activated by telephone.
for several seconds.
Navigation bar
Stored stations Symbol Function
It is possible to store up to 40 stations. Changing list view
Selecting a station Selecting category

1. "Radio"
Entering channel directly
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station. Time shift
Storing a station Accessing favorites, selecting

The station currently selected is stored. the My Favorites category
1. "Radio" Managing favorites

2. "Presets"
Traffic Jump
3. "Store station"
139
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
Managing subscription Deactivating channels

Clear reception is required for activating and 1. "Radio"
deactivating channels. Reception is best when 2. "Satellite radio"
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
3. Open "Options".
channel name is displayed in the status line.
4. "Manage subscription"
Activating channels
The category 'Unsubscribed Channels' includes
all channels that are not activated.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
The telephone number and electronic serial

number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
4. Select the category 'Unsubscribed Chan-
nels'.
5. Select desired channel. Using the onboard computer
The telephone number and electronic serial
1. "Radio"
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated. 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
This telephone number can also be used to

deactivate the channels.
140
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
Using the buttons near the CD player

Symbol Function
direction. Channel name
The next channel is selected.
Artist
Using direct channel entry
Track
1. "Radio"
Selecting category
3. "Set channel"
1. "Radio"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until you reach the
desired channel and then press the MINI joy-
stick. 3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel cur-
rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category. cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be
4. Select desired channel. available.
5. Press the MINI joystick again. The stored audio track can be played back at a
6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the different time from the live broadcast. If the
highlighted channel. cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if a
new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift

1. "Radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
7. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing list view

The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
> The red arrow indicates the current playback
Information about the channel is displayed.
position.
> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
> For live transmissions: "live".
141
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
Time shift menu Storing artist, track, or game

Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor-
Symbol Function
ites. The channel information must be available.
Go to live broadcast 1. "Radio"
Playback/pause
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
Next track gory.
4. Select desired channel.
Previous track
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
Fast forward 6. Select artist, track, or game.
Reverse Storing league or team

Automatic time shift deacti- Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
vated/activated from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
Automatic time shift 2. "Satellite radio"
When the function is activated, audio playback is 3. "Manage favorites"
stopped automatically in the event of: 4. "Add sports information"
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
> Activation of the voice activation system.
> Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
5. Select the desired league.
3. "Replay - Time shift"
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
4. "Automatic time shift"
Accessing favorites
Deactivating
If an activated favorite is being played, the mes-
"Automatic time shift"
sage "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Storing favorites
Select "Favorites" while the alert message is
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
being displayed.
list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game,
league, and team.
142
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
3. "Jump to:"
The displayed favorite will be played.
As soon as information about the selected
If it receives no notification, the system switches
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
into the 'My Favorites' category. All of the favor-
ites currently being broadcast can be selected A new panel appears in the display.
from a list. Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Managing favorites Symbol Meaning
Activating/deactivating favorites Information will be broadcast

Favorites can be activated or deactivated glo- soon.
bally and individually.
Information is currently being
1. "Satellite radio" broadcast.
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites. Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- Jump.
rently in use.
Automatic update
Deleting favorites About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
1. "Satellite radio" of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take sev-
2. "Manage favorites"
eral minutes.
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options". Notes
5. "Delete entry" > Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environ-
Traffic Jump mental or topographical conditions. The sat-
ellite radio has no influence on this.
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few min- > The signal may not be available in tunnels or
utes. underground garages or near trees, moun-
tains, or other powerful sources of radio
Selecting region interference.
1. "Radio"
3. Open "Options".
143
ENTERTAINMENT CD player
CD player
Vehicle equipment Selecting the track using the onboard

computer
optional equipment that is offered in the model Audio CDs
range is described. Equipment is also described 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
applies to safety related functions and systems. 3. Select the desired track. Press the
MINI joystick to start playback.
General information
Inserting CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. Die CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it
can take several minutes to the data, depending
on the folder structure.
CDs with compressed audio files
Playable formats Depending on the data, it is possible that not all
CD player indications on the CD will be correctly displayed.
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA 1. "CD/Multimedia"
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC 2. "CD"

3. Select the directory, if necessary.
Ejecting CD To change to a higher level directory: Move
Press the button on the CD player. the MINI joystick to the left.
The CD will be slid a short distance out from the
drive.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
144
CD player ENTERTAINMENT
4. Select a track and press the MINI joystick. 5. "Random"
Displaying information about the track Switch off random play sequence: Press the
MINI joystick.
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic replay
Selected tracks, folders, or CDs are automatically
repeated.
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD
> Track file name
Random play sequence

The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired CD.
4. Open "Options".
145
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
External devices
Vehicle equipment Connecting

Overview
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio playback:
Symbol Meaning
TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm
USB audio interface For audio playback over the vehicle speakers,
connect the headphones or line-out connection
Mobile phone audio interface of the device to the AUX-In connection 2.
Bluetooth audio Starting audio playback

The audio device must be switched on.
AUX-In connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
AUX-In connection
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi-
cle speakers.
> Recommended settings: Mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
3. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on the
audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
146
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
Adjusting volume Ask your MINI dealer for suitable audio devices/
1. "CD/Multimedia" mobile phones.
2. "External devices" if applicable

File systems
3. "AUX front"
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup-
4. "Volume" ported. The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends the FAT 32 format.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible,
depending on the vehicle equipment:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC, M4A
5. Turn MINI joystick until the desired volume
is set and then press the MINI joystick. > Without voice activation system: Playback
lists: M3U
> With voice activation system: Playback lists:
USB audio interface/ M3U, WPL, PLS
mobile phone audio Video files

interface Playback of standard video files with a compati-
ble Apple device is possible:
Overview > MPEG4
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
> H.264
They are operated using the onboard computer.
Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Connecting via the USB audio interface
Options for connecting external devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
devices, USB devices such as MP3 players,
USB memory sticks, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter, when
equipped with extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile phone: Apple
iPhone or mobile phones. Playback is only
possible if no plug is present in the USB 1 USB interface
audio interface. 2 Connection for audio/video playback:
Because of the large number of audio devices TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
147
Apple device Audio playback

A special adapter cable is available for connect-
ing the Apple device. The adapter cable is Starting audio playback
required for a proper connection. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Further information: 2. "External devices"
> At: www.mini.com/connectivity 3. Select the or symbol and press the
> At your MINI dealer. MINI joystick.
For audio playback over the vehicle speakers, Playback begins with the first track.
connect the Apple device using the special
adapter cable with AV-In connection 2 and USB Track search
interface 1 or using a flexible adapter cable with Selection is possible via:
a USB interface 1.
> Playback lists
The USB audio interface supports the menu
> Information: Music style, artist; if applicable,
structure of the Apple device.
composer, album, track.
USB device > Additionally for USB devices: File directory; if
applicable, composer.
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with a Track titles are displayed if they have been
flexible adapter cable. stored in the Latin alphabet.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 1.
Starting the track search
After initial connection 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Track information, e.g. artist or music style and 2. "External devices"

the playlists of the USB device are imported into 3. Select the or symbol.
the vehicle. This process can take some time.
The time required is dependent on the USB
device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be accessed
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi-
cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
4. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Art-
26,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist-
ist".
ing tracks may be deleted.
All entries are displayed in a list.
Copy protection > Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man- input. When a letter is entered, the
agement (DRM) cannot be played. results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
148
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Video playback
The video image on the onboard computer is
displayed when the vehicle is standing still; in
some countries only when the hand brake is
5. Select additional categories if desired. engaged or if the transmission is set on P.
Not all categories need to be selected. For For video playback, connect the Apple device to
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist the USB audio interface using the video-enabled
are to be displayed, call up that artist only. adapter cable.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis- 1. "CD/Multimedia"
played.
2. "External devices"
6. "Play"
3. Select the symbol and press the MINI joy-
stick.
Restarting a track search
4. "Video"
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback 5. Select the desired file.

List of tracks currently being played. Select category in file directory, if applicable.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence

The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
The playback of the selected video file is
3. Open "Options".
started.
4. "Random"
149
Notes Requirements
Do not subject the audio device to > Suitable device. Information is available at
extreme environmental conditions, e.g. www.mini.com/connectivity.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- > Device operational.
ating instructions for the audio device. Other-
> Ignition switched on.
wise the audio device may be damaged, impair-
ing driving safety while driving.< > Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 168, and in the device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, > Bluetooth presets in the device are required,
proper playback cannot always be ensured. e.g. connection not confirmed or visible,
refer to Owner's Manual for the device.
Information on connection > A number with at least 4 and at most
> The connected audio device is supplied with 16 digits has been established as the Blue-
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
device. Therefore, do not connect the device ing.
to the power socket in the vehicle.
> Do not use force when plugging the connec-
Pairing and connecting
tor into the USB interface. Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
to endangerment of passengers or other road
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
users.<
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
recharge external devices.
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"
Bluetooth audio The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends on
the device. If necessary, change the volume
setting on the device. 5. To perform other operations on the device,
> Up to four external devices can be paired refer to the operating instructions for the
with the vehicle. device: e.g. search for and connect Blue-
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
150
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on 5. Open "Options".

the device's display. 6. "Configure phone"
The onboard computer or the device will 7. Activate "Audio".
prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
8. "OK"
passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm. Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
8. Select desired functions with which the

device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is dis-
played as connected.
symbol displayed in white: Device is active as
symbol displayed in white: Device is active as
an audio source.
an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…,
refer to page 153. Playback
Connecting a particular device General information

A device that has already been paired can be > The display of track information depends on
connected as an active audio source. the device.
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is > Operation via the device or the onboard
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is computer are both possible.
connected via Bluetooth.
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange
takes place via a mobile phone that is con-
Prerequisite
nected via Bluetooth.
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired Starting playback
devices.
1. Connect device.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
151
4. Select the symbol. Player program

Depending on the device, there may be various
programs for playing music files.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Select player"
6. Select the desired program.
5. Select the desired track from the list.
Disconnecting an audio connection
Playback menu 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Depending on the device, all functions may not 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
be available. 3. Select the desired device from the list of con-
nected devices.
Symbol Function
4. Open "Options".
Next track 5. "Configure phone"
Fast forward: Press and hold the 6. Deactivate "Audio".
symbol. 7. "OK"
Previous track With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
Reverse: Press and hold the sym-
active.
bol.
Unpairing device
Track search 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Depending on the device, it is possible to search
by track.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
4. "Search device content"
5. "A-Z search"
6. Select desired entry or directory.
152
What to do if… Videos cannot be played or can only be played

Information about suitable devices is available with a delayed audio output.
at www.mini.com/connectivity. > Check the device compatibility. Information
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 167. is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.
Device not supported by vehicle. Playback is interrupted by the press of a button

or other messages on the device.
> If necessary, perform a software update;
refer to page 153. > Switch off key tones and other acoustic sig-
nal on the device.
Device could not be paired or connected.
Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
report and does not automatically continue.
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via the onboard com- > Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
puter. the radio control panel.
> A multi-digit passkey may be required. Playback is not possible when the mobile phone
is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
same time via the extended connectivity of the
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
music player in the mobile phone.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
> Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
the audio connection, refer to page 152,
delete the connections with other devices.
and start playback again.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
If you have gone through all items in the list and
mode or does it only have a small amount of
still cannot activate the desired function please
battery charge remaining? Charge the
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only Software update
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from The vehicle supports various external devices,
the vehicle and only pair and connect one depending on the software it is currently using.
device. A software update can enable the vehicle to
> Is the device no longer responding? Switch support, for example, new mobile phones or
the device off and back on again. new external devices.
> Repeat the pairing procedure. Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
No music can be played.
www.mini.com/connectivity.
> Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track via Displaying current version
the device.
The currently installed software is displayed.
> Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
1. "Settings"
the radio control panel.
2. "Software update"
Music files only play quietly.
3. "Show current version"
> Adjust volume settings on the device.
Select the desired version to display additional
information.
153
Updating software Note

The software update can only be performed MINI Connected, Office functions, and con-
when stopped. nected devices may temporarily be unavailable
1. Save the file for the software update in the during a software update or while restoring to
main directory of a USB data storage device. the previous version. Wait a few minutes until
the functions are available once more.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB interface of the USB audio interface in
the center console. It is not possible to per-
form the update using the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
3. "Settings"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Reinstalling previous version

The software version before the last software
update can be restored.
The restoring to the previous version can only be
performed when stopped.
1. "Settings"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. Select "OK" twice.
All of the listed software updates are removed.
154
155
Connect Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
Hands-free device Bluetooth
Vehicle equipment With other mobile phones or software versions,

malfunctions may occur.
In this chapter, all production, country, and A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
optional equipment that is offered in the model should not be operated via the mobile phone
range is described. Equipment is also described keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
selected options or country version. This also Displaying vehicle identification number
applies to safety related functions and systems. and software part number
To check which mobile phones are supported by
the hands-free device, the vehicle identification
Overview number and the software part number will be
required. The software version of the mobile
The concept phone may also be required.
Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle 1. "Telephone"
through Bluetooth.
2. Open "Options".
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
3. "Bluetooth® info"
tooth® SIG, Inc.
4. "Display system information"
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the vehi-
Notes
cle and can be controlled via the onboard com- Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme
puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by ambient conditions, for example, very high tem-
voice. peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile
phone may not work. Follow the operating
Up to four mobile phones can be paired.
instructions for your mobile phone.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions Pairing/unpairing mobile
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
phone
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger Requirements
vehicle occupants and other road users.< > Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 158.
> Mobile phone operational.
Suitable mobile phones
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
Precise information as to which mobile phones page 159, and in the mobile phone.
are supported by the hands-free device can be
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
found at www.mini.com/connectivity.
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
With a certain software version, these suitable visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phones support the vehicle functions mobile phone.
described below.
158
Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
> A number with at least 4 and at most 4. To perform other operations on the mobile
16 digits has been established as the Blue- phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
ing. Bluetooth device or a new device.
> Radio readiness switched on. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply the mobile phone display.
with all safety guidelines and regulations. 6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone
1. "Telephone" will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
2. Open "Options". passkey.
3. "Bluetooth®"
Enter the passkey and confirm.

or
Pairing and connecting
Compare the control number on the vehicle
Only pair the mobile phone when the
display with the control number on the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
mobile phone display. Confirm the control
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
number in the mobile phone and in the vehi-
other road users.<
cle.
1. "Telephone"
"OK"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
7. Select the functions that are to be used for
3. "Add new phone" the mobile phone.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- 8. "OK"
played.
9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…,
refer to page 160.
Following the initial pairing

> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or radio readi-
ness is switched on.
159
> After identification, phone book entries are What to do if…

imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
card of the telephone, depending on the to page 158.
telephone.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
> Four mobile phones can be paired. nected.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some > Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
secure connection, refer to the Owner's vehicle and in the mobile phone.
Manual for the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
Connecting a particular mobile phone
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
1. "Telephone" the onboard computer.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" > Is the passkey input taking longer than
All paired mobile phones are listed. 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected. > Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mobile phone using a charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
Unpairing mobile phone the vehicle and only pair and connect one
1. "Telephone" device.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" > Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
All paired mobile phones are listed. Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be unpaired.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
4. Open "Options".
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
5. "Remove phone from list"
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
160
> It is possible that only the phone book Incoming call

entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transferred. Receiving calls
> It may not be possible to display phone book If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
entries with special characters. book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
> The number of phone book entries to be
played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
stored is too high.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
> Is the amount of data for the contact too
number, then only the name of the caller is
large, e.g., because of stored information
transmitted.
such as addresses? Reduce the number of
data entries.
Accepting a call
The telephone connection quality is low. Press the button on the steering wheel
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- or
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal. "Accept"
> Place mobile phone in the area of the center

console.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Operation
Adjusting volume Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "End call"
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached.
rently in use.
161
Entering phone numbers 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from

a list.
"Return"
The conversion that was on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice, page 176. Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
Calls with multiple parties "on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
General information hold.
It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call. Establishing a conference call
These functions must be supported by the Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
mobile phone and by the service provider. phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party 2. "Conference call"
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call Both calls are always ended when a conference
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
Establish another call during an active call.
another party, the other call can be continued.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
162
Keypad dialing Calling a contact

Use keypad dialing to gain access to network 1. Select the desired contact.
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely Select the symbol. Contact with one
access an answering machine. This requires the phone number. The connection is estab-
DTMF code. lished.
1. "Telephone" 2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than
2. Select contact from a list or one phone number. Select phone number,
"Dial number" the connection is established.
3. "Keypad dialing" Call not possible, the mobile phone has no
reception or network.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard com- 3. "Edit entry"
puter. The contact can be edited.
For a conference call in progress, DTMF dialing is
not possible. Redialing
Phone book General information

The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
Displays transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
The phone book accesses the contacts of the mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers
telephone and shows all contacts for which a dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone
phone number is entered. The entries can be numbers depends on the mobile phone.
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone" Selecting the number using the onboard
computer
2. "Phone book"
1. "Telephone"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 165. 2. "Redial"
163
3. Select the desired entry and phone number, Calling a number from the list
if necessary. Select an entry.
The connection is established. The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone. phone.
1. Highlight the entry. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts Saving an entry in the contacts

1. Highlight the entry. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact". contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- 4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other". ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary. 5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary 6. "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls Hands-free system
Displaying calls General information

The list of received calls in the telephone is Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the tem can be continued using the mobile phone
mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis- and vice versa.
played. The sorting and displaying of phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone. From the mobile phone to the hands-
1. "Telephone" free system
2. "Received calls" Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
164
From hands-free system to mobile 5. Input text, refer to page 20.

phone When equipped with a navigation system:
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- Enter address. It is only possible to enter
tem can also be continued using the mobile addresses that are contained in the naviga-
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
phone. that route guidance is possible for all
At this point, follow the instructions that appear addresses.
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to 6. "Store" if necessary
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone. 7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address

Contacts It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
General information
1. "Home"
Contacts can be created and edited. The
2. Create a contact.
addresses can be used as destinations for navi-
gation. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
New contact My contacts

1. "Contacts"
General information
2. "New contact"
Listing all contacts from the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous

entries: "Delete input fields"
4. To fill in the entry fields: Select the symbol
next to the entry field.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.

Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
165
A symbol indicates the storage location of the Checking the address as a destination
contacts: An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
Symbol Storage location in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
destination. address.
2. Open "Options".
In the vehicle; the address 3. "Check as destination"
has been checked as a desti-
nation. 4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Mobile phone Selecting name sorting

Names can be displayed in different orders.
Editing a contact 1. "My contacts"
1. Select the desired contact. 2. Open "Options".
2. "Edit contact" 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
the mobile phone, the sorting of names can dif-
fer from the sorting selected.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
3. Open "Options".
3. Change the entry.
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
5. "Yes"
If a contact that comes from the mobile phone is
edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi-
cle, and only this copy is displayed. Under cer-
tain conditions, an identical contact entry is gen-
erated.
Selecting a contact as a destination

1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
tion"
166
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
Vehicle equipment Snap-in adapter

The snap-in adapter, refer to page 178, makes it
In this chapter, all production, country, and possible to:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
that is not available because of, for example, > Recharge its battery.
selected options or country version. This also > Connect it to an external antenna of the
applies to safety related functions and systems. vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
Overview A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
The concept keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle Suitable mobile phones
via Bluetooth. For precise information as to which mobile
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- phones and external devices with Bluetooth
tooth® SIG, Inc. interfaces are supported by the mobile phone
After being paired once, when the ignition is preparation package, go to www.mini.com/con-
switched on, these devices are automatically nectivity.
detected as soon as they are present in the vehi- With a certain software version, these suitable
cle and can be controlled via the onboard com- mobile phones support the vehicle functions
puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by described below.
voice. With other mobile phones or software versions,
Depending on whether they are functioning as a malfunctions may occur.
telephone and/or as an audio source, external It is possible to perform a software update, refer
devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele- to page 153.
phone functions will be described below. Oper-
ation of audio functions, refer to page 150.
Displaying vehicle identification number
It may be necessary for some functions to be and software part number
activated by the mobile phone provider. Checking which mobile phones are supported
Only make entries when traffic conditions by the mobile phone preparation requires the
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in vehicle identification number and software part
your hand while you are driving; use the hands- number. The software version of the mobile
free system instead. If you do not observe this phone may also be required.
precaution, your being distracted can endanger 1. "Telephone"
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
167
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
Notes > Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are

Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
ambient conditions, for example, very high tem- visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile mobile phone.
phone may not work. Follow the operating > If necessary, deactivate the audio connec-
instructions for your mobile phone. tion, refer to page 169.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
Pairing/unpairing mobile tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
phone ing.
> Ignition switched on.
Overview
> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
phone.
1. "Telephone"
> Using a mobile phone as an audio source.
2. Open "Options".
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 150. 3. "Bluetooth®"
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: Function inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone
Activating/deactivating additional
Auxiliary phone
functions
Audio source To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support this function, refer
Up to four external devices can be paired. Two
to page 167.
devices can be connected to the vehicle at a
time and used for different functions. The phone 1. "Telephone"
can be used to perform all of the following 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
phone functions. 3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
Requirements
5. Select desired additional function.
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 167.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 168, and in the mobile phone.
168
Bluetooth audio 4. To perform other operations on the mobile

Use a mobile phone as a telephone and as an phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
audio device in the vehicle. mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
"Bluetooth® audio"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
To use a mobile phone exclusively as a tele-
on the mobile phone display.
phone in the vehicle, deactivate the function
and reconnect the mobile phone. 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Office 6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes- will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
sages, and e-mails are imported from the passkey.
mobile phone into the vehicle.
"Office"
Auxiliary phone
Another mobile phone can be used as an auxil-
iary phone.
"Additional telephone"
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 172. Missed calls to the
auxiliary phone are shown in the Control Dis- Enter the passkey and confirm.
play. or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
Pairing and connecting display with the control number on the
Only pair the mobile phone when the mobile phone display. Confirm the control
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention number in the mobile phone and in the vehi-
may lead to endangerment of passengers or cle.
other road users.< "OK"
1. "Telephone" 7. Select the functions that are to be used for
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" the mobile phone.
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
8. "OK"
169
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone Configuring device

appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. 1. "Telephone"
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…, 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
refer to page 171.
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
Following the initial pairing 4. Open "Options".
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in 5. "Configure phone"
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or radio readi-
ness is switched on.
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card of the telephone, depending on the
telephone.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the Owner's 6. Activate/deactivate functions. At least one
Manual for the mobile phone. function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1. "Telephone" > "Additional telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" > "Audio"
All paired mobile phones are listed. 7. "OK"
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected. If a device is assigned a function, this may deac-
tivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary

phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con-
nected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
1. "Telephone"
The assigned functions before the unpairing of 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
the mobile phone are assigned to the mobile
phone when it is reconnected. If a mobile phone 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
is already connected, then these functions are
deactivated if necessary. Using the mobile phone as an audio
source
Device options Using the audio-capable mobile phone as an
Device options in devices that are paired and audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer to
connected can be activated or deactivated. page 169.
170
Activate and connect the mobile phone in vehi- > Is the passkey input taking longer than
cle, refer to page 169. 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
The mobile phone is used as an audio source if > Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
no other device is connected as an audio source. to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
If a device is already connected as an audio nections with other devices on the mobile
source: phone.
1. Activate and connect the mobile phone in > Is the audio connection activated? Deacti-
vehicle, refer to page 169. vate the audio connection.
2. "Use for audio" > Is the mobile phone in power economy

The mobile phone is connected as an audio
source. The previous audio source is no
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
longer connected to the vehicle.
charging cable.
Unpairing device > Depending on the mobile phone, it may only

1. "Telephone"
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" the vehicle and only pair and connect one
All paired mobile phones are listed. device.
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired. > Telephone functions not possible.
4. Open "Options". > Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
5. "Remove phone from list" phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
What to do if…
them are displayed, or they are displayed
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
incompletely.
to page 167.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
yet completed.
nected.
> It is possible that only the phone book
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
are transferred.
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> It may not be possible to display phone book
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
entries with special characters.
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via > The number of phone book entries to be
the onboard computer. stored is too high.
171
> The data volume of the phone book entry is Adjustments are only possible during a call and
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored must be carried out separately for each phone.
information such as notes? Reduce the data When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the
volume. settings.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio 1. "Settings"
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile 2. "Tone"
phone must be connected as a telephone.
3. "Volume settings"
The telephone connection quality is low.
4. To select the desired setting:
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
5. To adjust: Turn the MINI joystick.
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the vicinity of the cen-
ter console.
Incoming call
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and Receiving calls
speaker separately.
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
If you have gone through all items in the list and book and is transmitted by the network, then
still cannot activate the desired function please the name and number of the contact are dis-
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer. played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
Operation transmitted.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the num-
Adjusting volume
ber is displayed if it is transmitted by the net-
work.
An incoming call on a phone will be rejected
automatically when a call is active on the other
phone.
Accepting a call
or
Turn the knob until the desired volume is "Accept"

reached.
rently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec-
essary to adjust the volumes.
172
Rejecting a call Calls with multiple parties

"Reject"
General information
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated. It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call.
Ending a call These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
or Accepting a call while speaking to
1. "Telephone" another party
2. "End call" This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call

Establish another call during an active call.
Entering phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
Dialing a number 2. "Active calls"
1. "Telephone" 3. "Hold"
2. "Dial number" The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from

a list.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
Switching between two calls, toggling
voice.
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
hold.
173
Establishing a conference call 1. "Telephone"

Two calls can be connected to a single tele- 2. Select contact from a list or
phone conference call. "Dial number"
1. Establish two calls. 3. "Keypad dialing"
2. "Conference call"
4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard com-

Both calls are always ended when a conference puter.
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
another party, the other call can be continued. Phone book
Muting the microphone Displays

The microphone can be muted in active calls. The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
1. "Telephone"
phone number is entered. The entries can be
2. "Active calls" selected to make a call.
3. "Microphone mute" 1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 181.
The muted microphone is automatically acti-

vated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Calling a contact
Keypad dialing 1. Select the desired contact.
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network Select the symbol. Contact with one
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely phone number. The connection is estab-
access an answering machine. This requires the lished.
DTMF code.
174
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than Deleting a single entry or all entries
one phone number. Select phone number, Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
the connection is established. phone.
Call not possible, the mobile phone has no 1. Highlight the entry.
reception or network.
2. Open "Options".
Editing a contact 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
Saving an entry in the contacts
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is 1. Highlight the entry.
stored in the vehicle. 2. Open "Options".
1. Highlight the contact. 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
2. Open "Options". contact".
3. "Edit entry" 4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
The contact can be edited.
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
Redialing 6. "Store contact" if necessary
General information Received calls

The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
transferred to the vehicle, depending on the Displaying calls
mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers The list of received calls in the telephone is
dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
numbers depends on the mobile phone. mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis-
played. The sorting and displaying of phone
Selecting the number using the onboard numbers depends on the mobile phone.
computer 1. "Telephone"
1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"
2. "Redial"
Calling a number from the list

3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary. Select an entry.
The connection is established.
175
Deleting a single entry or all entries At this point, follow the instructions that appear
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
phone. the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

2. Open "Options". Operation by voice
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Equipped with voice activation system: Opera-
Saving an entry in the contacts tion, refer to page 21. For the list with the short
commands, refer to page 232, does not apply
for this type of voice operation.
2. Open "Options".
Equipped without voice activation system:
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing Depending upon the equipment, the mobile
contact". phone can be voice-operated as described
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- below.
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary. The concept
6. "Store contact" if necessary > The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering
Hands-free system wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is sup-
General information ported by means of announcements or
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- questions.
tem can be continued using the mobile phone > {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
and vice versa. operation system.
> {{...}} Identifies the answers generated by
From the mobile phone to the hands- the voice operation system.
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the Voice commands
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is Activating voice activation system
switched on. 1. Briefly press the button on the steering
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is wheel.
automatically switched to hands-free mode. 2. Say the command.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis- Finishing voice input
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the Press the button on the steering wheel
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone. briefly
or
From hands-free system to mobile
{Cancel}.
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
tem can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
176
Possible commands The command can be repeated as often as nec-

essary.
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button on the steering wheel. Deleting phone number
{Help}. {Delete}.
Possible commands are read aloud. All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Each digit can be spoken individually or com-

Redialing
bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process. {Redial}.
Using alternative commands Voice phone book

There are often a number of commands to run a Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
function, e.g.: may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
The entries must be entered by voice and are
Example: Dialing phone numbers independent of the mobile phone's memory. Up
to 50 entries can be set up.
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
Storing the entry
2. {Dial number}
1. {Save name}.
3. The system replies: {{Please say the num-
2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
ber.}}
speaking duration of about 2 seconds.
4. For example: {123 456 7890}
3. Say the phone number after being
5. The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Con- prompted to do so by the system.
tinue?}}
4. {Save}.
6. {Dial}
System replies: {{Dialing number.}} Deleting the entry
1. {Delete name}.
Calling
2. Say the name when prompted.
Dialing phone numbers 3. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Dial number}.
Deleting all entries
2. Say the phone number.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
3. {Dial}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
The connection to the desired subscriber is opened.
established.
2. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.
Correcting phone number 3. Confirm repeated prompt with {Yes}.
Digit sequences can be deleted after the system

has repeated the digits.
{Correct number}.
177
Reading and selecting the entries Snap-in adapter

1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is General information
opened. Detailed information on snap-in adapters that
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is compatibly support mobile phone functions can
read aloud. be found at your MINI dealer.
Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme
Selecting an entry ambient conditions, for example, very high tem-
1. {Dial name}. peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile
2. Say the name when prompted. phone may not work. Follow the operating
instructions for your mobile phone.
3. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.
Adjusting volume Installation location

Turn knob during announcement. In the center armrest.
> The volume remains the same, even if the

Inserting snap-in adapter
volume of other audio sources is changed.
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use the voice operation system to initiate
an emergency call. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele-
phone connection.
Ambient conditions 2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,

> Say the commands, numbers and letters arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
smoothly and with normal volume, empha- it clicks into place.
sis and speed.
> Always say the commands in the language
of the system. The language for voice oper-
ation is preset and can not be changed via
the Control Display.
> Keep doors, windows, glass sunroof/pan-
oramic sunroof, or convertible top closed to
avoid noise interference.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
178
Inserting mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be

necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons fac-
ing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
Removing mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
179
COMMUNICATIONS Office
Office
Vehicle equipment > Time zones, time, and date, refer to

page 64, are correctly adjusted on the Con-
In this chapter, all production, country, and trol Display and on the mobile phone in
optional equipment that is offered in the model order, for example, to correctly display
range is described. Equipment is also described appointments.
selected options or country version. This also Updating
applies to safety related functions and systems. Every time that the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated sep-
Overview arately.
1. "Office"
General information
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes- "Notes" or "Reminders"
sages and mobile phone e-mails can be dis-
3. Open "Options".
played using the Control Display if the mobile
phone compatibly supports these functions and 4. "Update data"
the required Bluetooth radio standards. Data from the mobile phone are again trans-
For information about which mobile phones and ferred to the vehicle.
functions are available, go to www.mini.com/
connectivity.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones Current office
are available for Office.
The number of unread messages and active
Contents are only displayed completely when tasks as well as upcoming appointments are dis-
the vehicle is stopped. played.
Only read access to the mobile phone is possi- 1. "Office"
ble.
2. "Current office"
Do not use Office while driving. Make
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
entries only when traffic and road condi-
tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by being
distracted.<
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
180
Office COMMUNICATIONS
Contacts Editing a contact

General information 2. "Edit contact"
Contacts can be created and edited. The con-
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destina-
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Change the entry.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is dis-
played.
Selecting a contact as a destination

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. 2. Select address.

Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z With contacts from the mobile phone, the
search is offered. address must be compared with the naviga-
A symbol indicates the storage location of the tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
contacts: Correct the address.
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address

has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address

has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone
tion"
Dialing phone numbers

2. Select phone number.
181
Checking the address as a destination that route guidance is possible for all
An address that is to be used in route guidance addresses.
must correspond to the navigation data stored 9. "Accept address" if necessary
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to 10. "Store contact in vehicle"
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the Contact types
address. Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned
2. Open "Options". various contact types.
3. "Check as destination"
Symbol Meaning
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of Private phone number
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone. Business phone number
New contact Mobile phone number
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone Other phone number

numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses, and
one Internet address. Private address
1. "Office"
Business address
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
Defining a home address
4. "New contact"
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting

Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "Office"
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous 2. "Contacts"
entries: "Delete input fields" 3. Open "Options".
6. To fill in the entry fields: Select the symbol 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
next to the entry field. last name"
7. Enter text and assign a contact type, refer to Depending on how the contacts were stored in
page 182. the mobile phone, the sorting of names can dif-
8. When equipped with a navigation system: fer from the sorting selected.
Enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
182
Displaying contact pictures Message type

Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the A symbol indicates the type of message.
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to Read message.
the vehicle. The number of pictures transmitted
Unread message.
depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
Symbol Message type
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" Text message
3. Open "Options".
E-mail from mobile phone
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Filtering message lists
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
A message list can be filtered if there is more
deactivated.
than one message type.
Deleting contacts 1. "Filter:"

Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are 2. Select message type.
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can- > "All"
not be deleted. All messages are displayed.
1. "Office" > "Text message"
2. "Contacts" Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
> "E-mail"
4. "Options"
Only text messages from mobile phones
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts". are displayed.
Text message
Messages
Calling a text message sender
General information 1. Select the desired message.
The displaying of text messages and e-mails 2. Select the symbol.
depends on whether the mobile phone supports
transmission to the vehicle. Text messages and Saving sender in the contacts
e-mails may not be supported by the service
1. Highlight the desired message.
provider or the function may have to be sepa-
rately activated. After a mobile phone is paired 2. Open "Options".
for the first time, the transmission may take sev- 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
eral minutes. Messages are only displayed com- contact"
pletely when the vehicle is stopped. Messages
from the auxiliary phone are not transmitted. Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
Displaying messages sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
1. "Office" selected, see page 186.
2. "Messages"
183
Reading text messages aloud Calendar

Reading text messages aloud, refer to page 186.
Displaying calendar
E-mail Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
Displaying e-mail
1. "Office"
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
2. "Messages"
Appointments of the current day are dis-
3. Select the desired message.
played.
Displaying e-mail contacts Selecting calendar day

If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were
1. Select date.
transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts,
then the contact is displayed. Select contact to
display details.
If the e-mail address is not stored in the con-
tacts, then it may be that only the e-mail address
is displayed.
2. Select desired day or date.

Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- > "Next day"
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or > "Date:"
selected, see page 186. > "Previous day"
> "Today"
Deactivating entire display
When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it Displaying appointment
is completely transferred to the vehicle. This
1. Select the desired appointment.
may result in charges.
2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:
1. "Office"
> Turn the MINI joystick.
2. "Messages"
> Select the symbol.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails" Using contact data
Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes-
phone is loaded into the vehicle. sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 186.
Reading e-mail
Reading e-mail, see page 186. Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 186.
184
Tasks Notes
Displaying task list Displaying notes
Display open tasks that must be completed 1. "Office"
within the next 90 days. 2. "Notes"
1. "Office" All notes are displayed.
2. "Tasks"
Displaying a note
Sorting task list 1. Select the desired note.
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:

2. To select sorting criterion: > Turn the MINI joystick.
> "Priority (!)" > Select the symbol.
> "Subject"
> "Due date" Using contact data
Displaying task sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
1. Select the desired task. selected, see page 186.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:

Reading a note aloud
> Turn the MINI joystick.
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 186.
Using contact data Reminders

sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or Displaying reminders
selected, see page 186.
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
Reading a task aloud
passed or a task is due, the reminder is deleted.
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 186.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is displayed.
185
Using contact data While the message is being read aloud, you have
the following options:
Overview > "Pause"
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- Interrupt the reading. Select again to
sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or resume the reading.
selected. > "Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
To display a contact or dial a phone
number: > Select the symbol.
1. "Use contact data" Skip back one paragraph.

Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the
MINI joystick to the left.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 167.
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Appointments, tasks, notes, or text mes-
> Select a contact to display a detailed view sages are not being displayed?
of the contact.
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
> Select a phone number to directly estab- missing function or is not correctly con-
lish a connection. nected.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxil-
Storing contact data
iary phone.
1. "Use contact data"
The Office function is deactivated.
2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail
The appointments are older than 20 days
address.
and are more than 50 days in the future.
3. Open "Options".
The tasks have been marked as completed
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new or are more than 90 days in the future.
contact"
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
Reading aloud in the vehicle.
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, > Appointments or tasks from the mobile
tasks, and notes can be read aloud to you. phone are not being displayed at the correct
1. Select the desired message, appointment, time?
task, or note. The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
2. Select the symbol. in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
186
> Texts of entries are not displayed com-

pletely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired function
please contact the Hotline or your MINI
dealer.
187
COMMUNICATIONS MINI Connected
MINI Connected
Vehicle equipment Only use software applications approved

by the manufacturer of your MINI; other-
In this chapter, all production, country, and wise, malfunctions may result.<
range is described. Equipment is also described Notes
that is not available because of, for example, For information on suitable mobile phones,
selected options or country version. This also available software applications, and their instal-
applies to safety related functions and systems. lation:
> At: www.mini.com/connectivity
Overview > At your MINI dealer.
The concept
Connecting a mobile
You can use MINI Connected to integrate certain
software applications of a suitable mobile phone phone
into your MINI. These software applications are
displayed on the Control Display. They are oper- Connecting via the USB audio interface
ated using the MINI joystick.
The range of software applications can be coun-
try-specific.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for the
function of MINI Connected:
> The operating system of the mobile phone
must support the software applications of
MINI Connected. 1 USB interface
> The software applications are installed on 2 Connection for audio/video playback:
the mobile phone and are operational. TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
> Suitable mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone using the special
> Appropriate mobile phone contract. connecting cable, available at your MINI dealer,
to the USB interface 1 and the AV-IN
Possible additional costs incurred are not
connection 2.
included with MINI Connected.
To perform other operations on the mobile
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
tion allows you to do so. If you do not
mobile phone: e.g. selecting and activating a
observe this precaution, your being distracted
software application.
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
188
MINI Connected COMMUNICATIONS
Connecting via the snap-in adapter PlugIn

The mobile phone can also be connected using Selected functions for an Apple device are
the snap-in adapter, refer to page 178. shown on the Control Display. Operation takes
place using the onboard computer.
1. Connecting an Apple device over a USB
Using MINI Connected audio interface, refer to page 188.
After successful connection of the mobile phone 2. "MINI Connected"

to the vehicle and activation of MINI Connected, 3. "PlugIn"
the applications are displayed on the Control 4. "Activate PlugIn"
Display and can be operated using the MINI joy-
5. Navigate among the functions shown via a
stick.
MINI joystick and, e.g., select a desired cate-
Volume adjustments can be made using the
gory or track.
buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10,
or using the volume control knob on the radio, Press the button to return back or to change
refer to page 135. to a level higher within the functions of the
Apple device.
1. Press the button.
This opens the main menu. Press the button twice to return back to the
main menu.
2. "MINI Connected"
Additional information can be found in the
MINI Connected Owner's Manual at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
3. Select the desired software application.

The extent of MINI Connected that is shown on
the Control Display depends on the range of
installed software applications on the mobile
phone.
The data transfer of the software applica-
tion from the telephone to the vehicle can
take a few minutes. Some software applications
depend on the speed of the available Internet
connection for the mobile phone.<
Certain versions of mobile phones used and
their software can make it impossible to use
MINI Connected and the Bluetooth hands-free
system at the same time.
After a phone call, it may be necessary to restart
the software application on the mobile phone.
189
Move Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment Closing

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
In this chapter, all production, country, and hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message
will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or miss-
ing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap

General information
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
Switch off the engine before refueling; manually release the fuel filler flap:
otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap 1. Open cargo area trim panel, arrow 1.

2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump sym-
Opening bol, arrow 2.
The fuel filler flap opens.
Observe the following when refueling

Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
1. Open the fuel filler flap. nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
> Premature pump shutoff
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap. > Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
192
Refueling MOBILITY
The fuel tank is full when you top off twice after The engine is knocking regulated. Therefore, dif-
the first time that the fuel pump nozzle clicks off. ferent grades of gasoline can be used for refuel-
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, ing.
overflowing fuel can cause damage to the
environment and the vehicle.< Recommended gasoline grades
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
Fuel tank capacity AKI 91.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other- Minimum quality
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
damage may occur.< AKI 89.
Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including the Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters. fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
If the engine can no longer be started because engine could be damaged.<
of an empty fuel tank, add at least 1.3 US gal/ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rating,
5 liters of fuel. If the vehicle is at an angle, a the engine may produce knocking sounds when
larger amount of fuel may be necessary. starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
The use of poor quality fuels may result in
Fuel specifications harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to driveability, start-
Gasoline ing and stalling, especially under certain envi-
For optimum fuel efficiency, the gasoline should ronmental conditions such as high ambient
be free of sulfur or as low in sulfur as possible. temperatures and high altitudes, may occur.
Fuels that are labeled at the pump as containing If driveability problems are encountered, we
metal may not be used. recommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade - AKI number -
Do not fill the tank with leaded gasoline or
for a few tankfuls. To avoid harmful engine
gasoline that contains metal additives,
deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
such as manganese or iron; otherwise, long term
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
damage to the catalytic converter or other com-
ponents may result.< Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in a need for unscheduled mainte-
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of up to
nance.<
10%, that is, E10, can be used.
The ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806-xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx
xx: Always observe currently valid standards.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
193
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment Pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct inflation
In this chapter, all production, country, and pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
optional equipment that is offered in the model temperature.
The tire inflation pressures apply to the
tire sizes approved and the tire brands
recommended by the manufacturer of your
MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise
you.<
Tire inflation pressures For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
Information for your safety > Tire sizes for your vehicle
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also > Maximum allowable driving speed
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- 100 mph or 160 km/h
sure. For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
Checking pressure pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly sures listed on the following pages in the col-
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
month and before starting long trips. If you fail 100 mph or 160 km/h.
to observe this precaution you may be driving These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
that can not only compromise your vehicle's door is open.
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and
the risk of an accident. Do not drive with
deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-
flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold
tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/
2 km driving or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, The maximum permitted speed for these
the tire inflation pressure is higher. tire inflation pressures is 100 mph or
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, 160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, page 73, tire damage and accidents may occur.<
or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, page 76.<
194
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Tire inflation pressures for driving above

100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the law could
occur.
195
Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper Countryman
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
Speeds up to a Speeds including those

max. of 100 mph / exceeding 100 mph /
160 km/h 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the

table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient temper-
ature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 230.
196
Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper S Countryman / Cooper S ALL4 Countryman
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
Speeds up to a Speeds including those

max. of 100 mph / exceeding 100 mph /
160 km/h 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the

table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient temper-
ature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 230.
197
Tire identification marks DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire Traction AA A B C
makes it easier to identify and choose the right Temperature A B C
tires.
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
Tire size
to these grades.<
e.g. 225/45 R 17 91 V
Nominal width in mm Tread wear
Aspect The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
ratio in X based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Radial belt construction under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
Rim diameter in inches ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
Load rating, 150 would wear one and one-half (1g) times as
(not on ZR tires) well on the government course as a tire graded
Speed code letter, 100. The relative performance of tires depends
(before the R on ZR tires) upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
Speed letter norm due to variations in driving habits, service
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h Traction
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
Tire Identification Number
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the may have poor traction performance.
US Department of Transportation.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
DOT code: based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, corner-
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteris-
For instance: DOT xxxx xxx 0212 tics.<
Manufacturer's code
for tire make Temperature
tire size and The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
tire design and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Tire age generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
Quality grades can be found where applicable heat when tested under controlled conditions
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
maximum section width. For example: tained high temperature can cause the material
Tread wear 200 Traction AA of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
Temperature A excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
198
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
performance which all passenger car tires must safety, new tires should be installed.
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent lev- Minimum tread depth
els of performance on the laboratory test wheel
that exceed the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC - run-flat tires

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular are distributed around the tire's circumference;
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
the tire, page 200. tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. If the tire tread has been
M+S driven down to the wear indicators, a tread
Winter and all-season tires. depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires. Tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
XL well as debris, curbs, and other obstacles can
Designation for specially reinforced tires. cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus-
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
Tire condition between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed,
Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the profile tires.
tread. Check the tread depth.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
Tread depth some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of such as pulling severely to the right or left.
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
In these cases, reduce speed immediately
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
and have wheels and tires thoroughly
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest
water are present on the road surface.
MINI dealer or a specialized tire shop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
Winter tires dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth facturer. If necessary, have the vehicle towed
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less there.
199
Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan- properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
gerous for vehicle occupants and other road age and related safety hazards. Make sure that
users.< the new wheels are balanced.<
Tire age Retreaded tires

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
the tire coding: mends that you avoid using retreaded
DOT ... 0212 means that the tire was manufac- tires, as this could impair driving safety. The
tured during the 2nd week of 2012. causes for this include potentially different tire
For various reasons, such as the development of casing structures and often wide variations in
brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI rec- tire age, which can result in a limited service
ommends tire replacement after no more than life.<
6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the
tires. Correct wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends mounting only wheels and tires
Run-flat tires that it has specifically approved for use on your
particular model. Although other wheels and
tires may theoretically have the same dimen-
sions, variations in factors such as manufactur-
ing tolerances can result in contact between tire
and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious
accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI can-
not evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to
determine if they are suited for use, and there-
fore cannot ensure the operating safety of the
vehicle if they are mounted.<
Your MINI dealer will be glad to inform you
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
about the correct wheel and tire combination for
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
your vehicle.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement The correct combination of wheels and tires is
in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can con- also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
tinue to be used subject to certain restrictions, various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.
even if depressurized. To maintain good handling and vehicle
For information on continuing to drive with a flat response, use only tires of a single brand and
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 73. tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
New wheels and tires
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Have new wheels and tires mounted only electronics
by your MINI dealer or a specialized tire When mounting new tires or changing over from
shop that has specially trained personnel work- summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use
ing in accordance with the specifications of the wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire
MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a
200
puncture, refer to page 76. Your MINI dealer will If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
be glad to advise you. permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
Recommended tire brands tires must be displayed in your field of view. This
label is available at your tire dealer or MINI
dealer.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
recommends certain tire brands. They are
marked with a clearly visible MINI designation Swapping wheels among the axles
on the sidewall of the tire. Depending on the individual use, front and rear
When properly used, these tires meet the high- tires may exhibit different wear and tear.
est standards in terms of safety and handling In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the
characteristics. wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your
MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.
Run-flat tires Always check the inflation pressure after the tire
When mounting new tires or changing over from rotation, if necessary change the pressure.
summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount
run-flat tires for your own safety. Keep in mind
that no space-saver spare tire is available in the Snow chains
event of a flat. Your MINI dealer will be glad to
advise you. Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI,
Special characteristics of winter tires classified as road-safe and recommended. Con-
tact your MINI dealer for more details.
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
winter tires for use on roads in winter, or at tem- Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front
peratures below 45 7/+76. Although all-sea- wheels with the following tires.
son M+S tires provide better winter traction than > 195/60 R 16 M+S
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
same levels of cold-weather performance as mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
winter tires. of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
Pay attention to speed
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
Always comply with the speed limit for the instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
winter tires mounted on your car; failure When driving with snow chains, it can be useful
to do so could result in tire damage and acci- to briefly deactivate DSC or activate DTC, refer to
dents.< page 71.<
201
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment General information

In this chapter, all production, country, and Never attempt to perform any service or
optional equipment that is offered in the model repair operations on your vehicle without
range is described. Equipment is also described the required professional technical training. If
that is not available because of, for example, you do not know how to follow the specified
selected options or country version. This also instructions, then have the work carried out by
applies to safety related functions and systems. your MINI dealer. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
age and related safety hazards.<
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number 5 Coolant expansion tank 205

2 Battery, under the cover 223 6 Engine compartment fuse box 220
3 Engine oil dipstick 203 7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp
4 Engine oil filler neck 204 and window washer system 55
202
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
Releasing Closing
Pull the lever. Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
Do not clean the windshield and head- 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
lamps if the hood is unlocked as this may to engage.
damage the headlamp washer system.< If you notice any signs while driving your
vehicle that the hood is not completely
Opening closed, stop at once and close it securely.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving style
and operating conditions, e.g., with a very
sporty driving style, the engine oil consumption
is significantly increased.
To avoid damage, make sure that the Therefore, check the engine oil level regularly
wiper arms are against the windshield after each refueling.
before you open the hood.<
Press the release handle and open the hood. Checking engine oil level
1. With the vehicle's engine at normal operat-
ing temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least 6 miles/10 km, park the
vehicle on a level surface.
3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes
and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper
towel or similar material.
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into
the guide tube and pull it out again.
The oil level should be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
203
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Oil types for refilling
Notes
Do not use oil additives as this could result
in engine damage.<
When choosing oil, ensure that it belongs
to one of the SAE viscosity classes 0W-40,
0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30; otherwise, malfunc-
tions and damage to the engine may result.<
The oil quantity corresponding to the difference The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
between the two marks on the dipstick is engine.
1 US quart/1 liter. Some types of oil may not be available in every
Do not fill beyond the upper mark on the country.
dipstick. Excess oil will damage the
engine.< Approved oil types
Adding engine oil Gasoline engines
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Additional information on approved types of oil

can be found at a MINI dealer.
Do not add the maximum quantity of Alternative oil types

1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level If the approved engine oils are not available, up
has dropped to just above the lower mark on the to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the fol-
dipstick, page 203. lowing specification may be used:
Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam- Gasoline engines
aged.<
API SM or higher specifications
If too much motor oil is added, immedi-
ately have the vehicle checked; otherwise,
damage to the engine may result.< Oil change
Keep oils, grease, etc. out of the reach of Only MINI dealers are to perform oil changes.
children and comply with the warnings on
the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may
result.<
204
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Coolant Topping off

1. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
Coolant consists of half water and half additive. counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
Not all commercially available additives are suit- pressure to escape, then continue turning to
able for your MINI. Your MINI dealer knows open.
which additives are suitable and will be glad to
2. Slowly fill to the correct fluid level; do not
advise you.
overfill.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
3. Close by turning the cap.
engine damage may result. Because addi-
tives are harmful to your health, it is important Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated
to follow the instructions on the containers.< as soon as possible.
Comply with the appropriate environmen-
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.<
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Checking coolant level

Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
The coolant level is correct if it is between the

Min and Max markings.
205
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment On the Control Display, you can have the

remaining times or distances for selected main-
In this chapter, all production, country, and tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
optional equipment that is offered in the model displayed, page 62.
that is not available because of, for example, Service data in the remote control
selected options or country version. This also Your vehicle continuously stores service-
applies to safety related functions and systems. requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your MINI dealer can read
out this data from the remote control unit, and
MINI Maintenance System propose an optimized maintenance approach.
Whenever you take your car in for servicing you
should therefore hand your MINI dealer the
remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, page 65; otherwise, the effective-
ness of Condition Based Service CBS is not
assured.<
Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models and Warranty and
The MINI Maintenance System supports the Service Guide Booklet for Canadian
preservation of the traffic and operating safety models
of your MINI. The objective is to optimize efforts Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
costs. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
If and when you come to sell your MINI, a additional information on service requirements.
comprehensive record of servicing will prove a The manufacturer of the MINI recom-
significant benefit. mends that you have service and repair
operations performed at your MINI dealer.
Condition Based Service CBS Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
Sensors and special algorithms take the different cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
driving conditions of your MINI into account. cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
Condition Based Service uses this to determine for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
the current and future service requirements. By Booklet for Canadian models. These entries ver-
letting you define a service and maintenance ify that your vehicle has received the specified
regimen that reflects your own individual regular maintenance.<
requirements, the system builds the basis for
trouble-free driving.
206
Maintenance MOBILITY
Socket for On-Board Data memory

Diagnosis OBD Your vehicle displays data about the operation,
malfunctions, and user settings. These data are
stored in the vehicle and can be partly stored in
the remote control; the data can be read by suit-
able devices, in particular at your MINI dealer.
The data read out are used for supporting the
service processes and repair or for optimization
and development of vehicle functions.
The primary components that make up the

emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
Emissions
The warning lamps come on. The vehicle
is producing higher emissions. You can
continue your journey, but moderate
your speed and exercise due caution.
Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
will flash or light up continuously. This indicates
excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the
engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and
visit the nearest MINI dealer as soon as possible.
Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious dam-
age of emissions-related components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter. In addition,
mechanical engine components can become
damaged.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapors are escaping, causing an indica-
tor to light up. If the fuel cap is then tightened,
the indicator should go out within a few days.
207
MOBILITY Care
Care
Vehicle equipment External care

In this chapter, all production, country, and Washing your vehicle
Especially during the winter months the
vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt
and road salt can damage the vehicle.<
applies to safety related functions and systems. After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
Car-care products short term and the brake rotors can corrode.<
Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the Car washes

value of your MINI. Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends Do not use automatic high-pressure car
using manufacturer-approved products to clean washes; otherwise, water may drip into
and care for your vehicle. the vehicle around the windows.<
Your MINI dealer would be pleased to advise Before driving into the car wash, check if the sys-
you on cleaning and care products and services tem is suitable for your MINI. Observe the fol-
for your MINI. lowing points:
The ingredients of original MINI Care Prod- > Vehicle dimensions, page 229
ucts have been tested, and the products
> If necessary: Fold in the outside mirrors,
have been tested in the laboratory and in prac-
page 42
tice. They offer optimum care and protection for
your vehicle.< > Maximum permissible tire width
Do not use any cleansers containing alco- Avoid car washes with tracks higher than
hol or solvents as these may cause dam- 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the chassis could
age.< be damaged.<
Cleaning agents may contain hazardous Preparations for driving into the car wash:
or health-damaging substances. Follow > Unscrew the rod antenna.
the warning and hazard instructions on the > Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent unin-
packaging. For interior cleaning, always open tentional wiping.
the doors or windows of the vehicle.
> Deactivate rear window wiper and protect it
Do not use any products that are not intended
from damage. Ask the car wash operator
for cleaning the vehicle.<
about measures that can be taken to protect
the wipers.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil-
ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos-
sibility that they could be damaged.
> Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.
208
Care MOBILITY
Automatic transmission shampoo and then washing with plenty of

Before driving into the car wash, make sure that water.
the vehicle can roll: Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort an ice scraper; use window deicers instead.
Access, in the ignition lock.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside of the windows and
3. Release the parking brake.
mirrors with a window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock containing quartz.<
so that the vehicle can roll.
Wiper blades
Steam jets/high-pressure washers Clean with soapy water and change regularly to
When using steam jets or high-pressure prevent the formation of streaks.
washers, make sure that you maintain suf-
Wax, preservatives and dirt on the win-
ficient distance from the vehicle and do not
dows cause streaks when the windshield
exceed a maximum temperature of 1407/
wipers are on, and can cause premature wear of
606.
the wiper blades and interfere with the rain sen-
If the distance is too close, the pressure too high,
sor.<
or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle
can be damaged, or water can penetrate.
Paintwork, care
Observe the operating instructions for high-
pressure washers.< Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
Do not spray sensors such as Park Dis-
effects of aggressive substances.
tance Control with high-pressure washers
for a long time and maintain the greatest possi- Environmental influences in areas with
ble distance of approx. 1 ft/30 cm from them.< increased air pollution or natural contaminants,
such as tree sap or pollen, can affect the vehicle
Manual washing paintwork. It is therefore important to adjust the
frequency and extent of vehicle care corre-
Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car
spondingly.
shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean
the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush Immediately remove any particularly aggressive
applying a slight amount of pressure. substances, such as fuel that has overflowed, oil,
grease, brake fluid, or bird droppings; otherwise,
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
paint damage can be caused.
vate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition
to prevent unintentional wiping.<
Removing paintwork damage
Observe local regulations regarding wash-
Depending on the severity of the damage,
ing vehicles by hand.<
immediately repair stone damage or
scratches to prevent rusting.<
Headlamps
The manufacturer of the MINI recommends
Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or cor-
repairing paint damage professionally according
rosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and con-
to factory specifications with original MINI
tamination, such as insects, by soaking with
paints.
209
MOBILITY Care
Preservation Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not

Preservation is necessary when water no longer rub forcefully.<
beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of
the paint, only use preservatives that contain clothing can damage seat covers. Make
carnauba or synthetic waxes. sure that all Velcro fasteners are closed.<
Rubber seals Leather/leather coverings

Only treat with water or rubber care products. The leather processed by the manufac-
Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon- turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural
containing care products on rubber seals; product. Light variations in the grain is one of
otherwise, noise and damage could occur.< the typical properties of natural leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
Chrome parts leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator increased wear and causing the leather surface
grill and door handles with copious quantities of to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or
water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive, vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular
especially when contaminated with road salt. basis.
For additional treatment, use chrome polish. Especially when the leather has a light color, it
should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get
Light alloy wheels heavily soiled.
The system produces brake dust that collects on Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack
acid-free wheel cleaner. the leather's protective layer.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
highly alkaline, or abrasive cleansers or Carpets/floor mats
steam jets hotter than 1407/606 as they may Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
cause damage.< out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
External sensors pedals during driving.
Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
such as the Park Distance Control clean ing one or onto other objects.
and ice-free to ensure that they function prop- Only use floor mats that have been approved for
erly.< the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Internal care
Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned.
Upholstery/fabrics If the carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfi-
Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove sur- ber cloth and water or an interior cleaner. When
face dirt. doing so, rub forward and back in the driving
direction; otherwise, the carpet may become
In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use
matted.
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and
suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instruc-
tions on the packaging.
210
Care MOBILITY
Interior plastic parts Vehicle storage

These include:
If you park your vehicle longer than three
> Plastic surfaces
months, ask your MINI dealer to advise you.
> Lamp glass
> Display panes
> Mat parts
Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent-
free plastic cleaners.
Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac-
quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,
as these will damage the surfaces.<
Decorative strips
Only clean decorative strips with moist cloths.
Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Displays
To clean displays, such as the radio or display
elements, use an anti-static microfiber cloth.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
the display as this can cause damage.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any
kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical
components may otherwise become corroded
or damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs as this could
damage parts of the drive.<
211
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment Changing the rear wiper blade

Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
Do not place windshield wipers on the 2. Rotate the wiper blade toward the back as
windshield if wiper blades are not far as it will go, arrow.
installed; otherwise, the windshield may be
damaged.< 3. Press the wiper blade against the limit and
thus out of the mounting.
Changing the front wiper blades 4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it. until it engages audibly.
Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be
handled carefully. The manufacturer of your
MINI recommends having your MINI dealer per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2. your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
3. Pull the wiper blade forward and out of the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
catch mechanism.
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture the bulb by its base.<
until it engages audibly.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
To avoid damage, make sure that the at your MINI dealer.
wiper arms are against the windshield
Only replace bulbs after they have cooled
before you open the hood.<
down; otherwise, you may burn your fin-
gers.<
212
Replacing components MOBILITY
When working on electrical systems, less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the
always begin by switching off the con- journey with great care, provided that local leg-
sumer in question; otherwise, short circuits islation does not prohibit this.
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- Work on the xenon lighting system,
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe including lamp replacement, is only to be
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- carried out only by your MINI dealer. Due to high
turer.< voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on
Caring for headlamps, refer to page 209. the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<
For any bulb replacement not described
below, contact a MINI dealer or a work- Halogen low beams and high beams
shop that has specially trained personnel work- H13 bulb, 60/55 watts
ing in accordance with the specifications of the The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore,
MINI manufacturer.< wear safety glasses and protective gloves.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is
please contact your MINI dealer.< damaged.<
Be careful when installing the cover;
Light-emitting diodes LEDs otherwise, leaks could occur and cause
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- damage to the headlamp system.<
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These Accessing the lamp from the engine
light-emitting diodes are related to conven- compartment
tional laser diodes, and legislation defines them The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. from the engine compartment.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlamp glass lens

In cool or humid weather, condensation may
occur on the interiors of the headlamps. During
trips with the headlamps on, the condensation
disappears after a short time. The headlamps do
not need to be changed. Removing the cover:
Do not remove the condensation from head- 1. Press the tab.
lamps, despite driving with lights on, and if con- 2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the
densation increases, e.g., because of water holder.
droplets, have this checked by your MINI dealer.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of failure very low, provided that
they are not switched on and off an excessive
number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe-
213
Replacing the bulb Replacing a turn signal bulb

1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1, 21 watt bulb, P21W, if necessary PY 21 W
and remove it, arrow 2. 1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover.
2. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and disconnect

the connector, arrow 2.
4. Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise.
3. To insert the new bulb and replace the

cover, proceed in reverse order.
Turn signals, parking lamps, roadside

parking lamps, and fog lamps 5. To insert the new bulb and replace the cov-
ers, proceed in reverse order.
Accessing the lamps via the wheel well
Replacing a parking/roadside parking
lamp bulb
5 watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
3. Unscrew the upper bulb counterclockwise.
1 Turn signal
2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps
214
2. Squeeze clamping clip, arrows, and remove

bulb holder.
3. Unscrew bulb counterclockwise and
replace.
Side marker lamps

Have these bulbs replaced by your MINI dealer.
cover, proceed in reverse order. Tail lamps
Bulb P 21 W
Replacing a fog lamp bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
3. Pull the cable connector.
4. Unscrew the lower bulb counterclockwise.
1 Brake/tail lamp
2 Turn signal
3 Brake/tail lamp
4 Backup lamps
5 Backup lamps
Changing
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
1. Switch off the light and remove the infrared
Side turn signals remote control from the ignition lock.
5 watt bulb, W 5 W 2. Push the cover panel out from the rear of the
1. Open hood. cargo area side trim panel and remove it.
215
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down Repairing a flat tire

on the clamping clip, arrow.
Safety measures in the event of a break-
down:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
traffic and switch on the hazard warning flash-
ers.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking
brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place
the selector lever in position P.
4. Remove bulb holder. All passengers should be outside the vehicle and
in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail.
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn-
Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the
ing it to the left for removal and replace-
appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with
ment.
all safety guidelines and regulations.<
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
In the event of a flat tire, different procedures
clicks into place.
should be followed depending on the equip-
7. Replace the cover panel. ment included in your vehicle:
> MINI Mobility Kit, refer to the following sec-
License plate lamps
tion
5 watt bulb, C 5 W
> Run-flat tires, page 200
MINI Mobility Kit

The Mobility Kit is located under the left front
seat.
Preparations
Use of the MINI Mobility Kit may be ineffective if
the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm
or more. Contact the nearest MINI dealer if the
1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the tire cannot be made drivable with the Mobility
left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1. Kit.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2. Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen-
3. Replace the bulb. etrated the tire if possible.
4. Insert the lamp. Follow the instructions on using the Mobil-
ity Kit found on the compressor and the
Center brake lamp sealant bottle.<
This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In Remove the adhesive label for the speed limit
the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI from the sealant bottle and affix it to the steer-
dealer or a workshop that has specially trained ing wheel.
personnel working in accordance with the spec-
ifications of your MINI manufacturer.
216
Sealant and compressor Using the Mobility Kit

To repair a tire puncture with the Mobility Kit,
proceed as follows:
> Fill the tire with sealant.
> Distribute the sealant.
> Correct the tire inflation pressure.
Filling the tire with sealant.

Proceed in the specified order; otherwise,
sealant may emerge under high pres-
1 Sealant bottle and adhesive label with speed
sure.<
limit
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2 Filling hose
2. Pull the connecting hose 6 completely out of
Note the use-by date on the sealant bot-
the compressor housing and screw it onto
tle.<
the connector of the sealant bottle. Make
sure that the hose is not kinked.
3. Insert the sealant bottle on the compressor
housing in an upright position.
3 Holder for the sealant bottle

4 Compressor
5 Plug and cable for the socket in the vehicle
interior, page 97 4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
6 Connection hose to connect the compressor defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2
and sealant bottle or the compressor and of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
wheel 5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.
7 On/off switch 6. Insert the plug 5 into the lighter socket/
8 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire infla- power socket in the vehicle interior,
tion pressure page 97.
9 Release button for reducing the tire inflation 7. With the engine running:
pressure Switch on the compressor and let run for
Connector, cable and connection hose are about 3 to 8 minutes in order to add the
stored in the compressor housing. sealant and to achieve an inflation pressure
of about 1.8 bar/26 psi.
When adding sealant, the filling pres-
sure can temporarily increase up to
217
about 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the Correct the tire inflation pressure.
compressor during this phase.< 1. After driving approx. 3 miles/5 km or ten
Do not run the compressor for longer minutes, stop at a suitable location.
than 10 minutes; otherwise, the 2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com-
device will overheat and possibly be dam- pressor directly onto the tire valve.
aged.<
3. Insert the plug 5 into the power socket in
8. Switch off the compressor. the vehicle interior.
If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not 4. Adjust tire pressure to 1.8 bar/26 psi. With
reached: the engine running:
1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel > To increase the inflation pressure: switch on
and drive the vehicle forward and backward the compressor. To check the current infla-
approx. 33 ft/10 m to distribute the liquid tion pressure, switch off the compressor.
sealant in the tire evenly.
Do not run the compressor for longer
2. Inflate the tire again with the compressor. than 10 minutes; otherwise, the
If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi device will overheat and possibly be dam-
still cannot be reached, then the tire is too aged.<
heavily damaged. Please contact the nearest > To decrease the inflation pressure: press the
MINI dealer.< release button 9.
If the tire cannot maintain the inflation
Stowing Mobility Kit
pressure, drive the vehicle again, refer to
1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps
from the wheel. 1 to 4.
2. Unscrew connecting hose of the If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi still can-
compressor 6 from the sealant bottle. not be reached, then the tire is too heavily dam-
3. Connect the filler hose 2 of the sealant bot- aged. Contact your nearest MINI dealer.<
tle to the unoccupied connection on the
sealant bottle. Driving on
This prevents the rest of the sealant from Do not exceed the permitted maximum
escaping from the bottle. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may
4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable result in an accident.<
material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
5. Stow Mobility Kit back in the vehicle. and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
anced.
Distributing the sealant. Have the Mobility Kit refilled.
Immediately drive approx. 3 miles/5 km so that
the sealant evenly distributes itself.
Do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/
80 km/h.
If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/
20 km/h.<
218
Changing wheels of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and

personal injury.<
The pouch with the wheel changing kit is stored 1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to
under the flat load floor. the wheel.
It includes: The jack base must be perpendicular to the
> Vehicle jack surface beneath the jacking point.
> Reversible ratchet
> Wheel stud wrench
> Extractor hook for wheel center cover
> Chock
Preparing for a wheel change

Observe the safety precautions regarding
flat tires on page 216.<
Additional safety measures when chang- 2. Slide reversible ratchet onto the fixture on
ing tires: the jack, arrow 1.
Only change the tire when parked on a surface
that is level, firm and not slippery.
The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on
soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow,
ice, flagstones, etc.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine
when the vehicle is supported by the jack; other- 3. As you ratchet up the jack, place the jack
wise, there is a risk of fatal injury.< head onto the lifting point on the body,
1. Place the foldable chock behind the front arrow 2.
wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in 4. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an changing is raised off the ground.
incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface
with a more severe slope, take additional Mounting the wheel
precautions to secure the vehicle from roll-
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
ing.
wheel.
2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn. the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Clean the lug bolts.
Jacking up the vehicle
3. Lift the new wheel into place.
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise
opposite bolt holes.
another vehicle model with it or to raise any load
5. Screw in the remaining bolts.
219
6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal Disposal

pattern. After replacing old batteries, return the
7. Lower the vehicle. used batteries to your MINI dealer or to a
8. Remove the jack. recycling center. Maintain the battery in an
upright position for transport and storage.
Tightening the lug bolts Always secure the battery against tipping over
during transport.<
Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Immediately have the wheels checked Power failure
with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise,
may not be fully functional and may require ini-
incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a
tialization. Individual settings are also lost and
safety hazard.<
must be reprogrammed:
Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.
> Time and date
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible These values must be updated, page 64.
and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
> Radio
anced.
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, page 137.
> Onboard monitor
Vehicle battery
Operability must be waited for, page 112.
Maintenance > Glass sunroof, electric

It may only be possible to tilt the sunroof, if
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
applicable. The system must be initialized.
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
Contact your nearest MINI dealer.
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate.
Battery replacement
Fuses
Only use vehicle batteries that have been Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or
approved for your vehicle by the manu- replace it with a fuse of a different color or
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam- Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in
aged and systems or functions may not be fully the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload.
available.< Have fuses replaced by your MINI dealer.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery A fuse allocation diagram is located on the inside
registered on the vehicle by your MINI dealer to of the fuse box cover panels.
ensure that all comfort functions are fully avail-
able.
Charging the battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the
engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump-start-
ing on page 222.
220
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover

Press the latch.
In the vehicle interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover

Press out at the recess.
221
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance
Vehicle equipment Warning triangle

Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance is available by phone In the cargo area under the loading sill.
24 hours a day in many countries. You can To remove, open the two clasps.
obtain assistance there in the event of a vehicle
breakdown.
Jump-starting
First aid pouch If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine
can be started by connecting two jumper cables
Some of the articles contained in the first aid to another vehicle's battery. You can also use
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, the same method to help start another vehicle.
check the expiration dates of the contents regu- Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated
larly and replace any items in good time, if nec- clamp handles.
essary.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible per-
sonal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi-
cle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi-
The first aid pouch is located on the rear cargo mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
well by the left side trim panel or under the pull- information can be found on the battery.
out floor panel. 2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
222
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
Connecting jumper cables Body ground in MINI:

Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could cause
injury occur.<
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com-
partment to access the positive terminal of
your MINI.
6. Attach the second terminal clamp of the

minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

2. Release the tabs on the left and right sides of 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
the positive terminal cover, arrows 1, and lift allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
the cover to open, arrow 2. increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started
in the usual manner.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ If necessary, have the battery checked and
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the recharged.
battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the Never use spray fluids to start the
vehicle providing assistance. engine.<
4. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of Tow-starting, towing
the vehicle to be started. away
5. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the Observe applicable laws and regulations
battery or to an engine or body ground of for tow-starting and towing.<
the assisting vehicle. Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
223
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
Using a tow fitting Being towed

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or at refer to page 48; otherwise, the low
the right rear. beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield
Depending upon the vehicle features, the tow wipers may be unavailable. Do not tow the vehi-
fitting is located cle with just the rear axle raised, as this would
allow the steering to turn.<
> Under the right or left front seat.
There is no power assist while the engine is off.
> In the pouch for the tire-changing set in the
Thus, braking and steering will require increased
luggage compartment.
effort.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
ing on local regulations.
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
Manual transmission
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.< Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Access to screw thread Automatic transmission

Press sideways on the cover, vehicle outer side. Tow vehicles with automatic transmission
This will push out the opposite side of the cover, only with a tow truck or with the front
which can then be removed. wheels lifted; otherwise, the transmission can be
damaged.<
Front
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
With towbar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side
Rear on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to
avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please
observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
224
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
With tow rope Tow-starting

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
sure that the tow rope is taut. ble; instead, jump-start the engine, page 222.
To avoid jerking and the associated Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only
stresses on vehicle components when be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as started at all.
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could 1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
result in damage.< with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, page 48.
With tow truck: Vehicles without ALL4
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
all-wheel drive
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly
release the clutch. After the engine starts,
immediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Have the MINI Countryman transported by a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
With tow truck: Vehicles with ALL4 all-

wheel drive
Do not have your vehicle with ALL4 all-
wheel drive towed with the front or rear
axle raised individually; otherwise, the wheels
may lock and the transfer case may be dam-
aged.<
Only have your MINI Countryman transported

on a flat bed.
225
Find Me.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
Engine data
Cooper Cooper S
Displacement cu in/cmm 97.5/1,598 97.5/1,598
Number of cylinders 4 4
Maximum power out- hp 121 181

put
At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 114/155 177/240

with overboost – 192/260
At engine speed rpm 4,250 1,600-5,000

with overboost – 1,700-4,500
Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.
228
Technical data REFERENCE
Dimensions
Cooper Cooper S
1 Vehicle height without roof 61.5/1.561 61.5/1.561

antenna
2 Track, front 60/1.525 60/1.525
3 Vehicle width, with outside mirror 78.5/1.995 78.5/1.995
4 Track, rear 61.1/1.551 61.1/1.551
5 Vehicle width, without outside 70.4/1.789 70.4/1.789

mirror
229
REFERENCE Technical data
Cooper Cooper S
6 Wheelbase 102.2/2.595 102.2/2.595
7 Vehicle length 161.7/4.108 161.8/4.110
All dimensions in in/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 38.1 ft/11.6 m.
Weights
Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,954/1,340 3,053/1,385 3,208/1,455
> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,020/1,370 3,097/1,405 3,252/1,475
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,858/1,750 3,990/1,810 4,101/1,860
> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,924/1,780 4,034/1,830 4,145/1,880
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,127/965 2,183/990
> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,172/985 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870 1,918/870 2,017/915
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/ 12.4 - 41.3/ 12.4 - 41.3/ 12.4 - 41.3/
liters 350 - 1,170 350 - 1,170 350 - 1,170
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.
230
Technical data REFERENCE
Capacities
US gal/US quarts Liters Notes
Fuel tank 12.4/– approx. 47 Fuel grade: page 193
including reserve of 2.1/– approx. 8
Window washer system incl.

headlamp washer system –/4.2 approx. 4 For more details: page 55
231
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
Short commands for the voice

activation system
Vehicle equipment General information

In this chapter, all production, country, and Instructions for the voice activation system, refer
optional equipment that is offered in the model to page 21.
range is described. Equipment is also described Having the possible spoken commands read
that is not available because of, for example, aloud: {Voice commands}
The following short commands apply to vehicles
with voice activation system. They do not work
for equipment with which only the mobile
phone can be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
Accessing services {Assist}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Selecting route guidance {Guidance}
232
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
CD/Multimedia
CD drive
Function Command
Playing a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD {C D}
External devices
Function Command
Selecting external devices {External devices}
Tone control
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
233
Radio
FM
Function Command
Selecting the radio {Radio}
Selecting FM stations {F M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
AM
Function Command
Selecting AM stations {A M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Satellite radio
Function Command
Selecting the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
234
Stored stations
Function Command
Selecting stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Telephone
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
To redial {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Office
Function Command
Calling up the Office menu {Office}
Displaying Current office {Current office}
Displaying contacts {Contacts}
235
Function Command
Displaying messages {Messages}
Displaying calendar {Calendar}
Displaying tasks {Tasks}
Displaying reminders {Reminders}
Contacts
Function Command
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Selecting route guidance {Guidance}
Starting route guidance {Start guidance}
Ending route guidance {Stop guidance}
Retrieving home address {Home address}
236
Function Command
Selecting route criteria {Route preference}
Selecting route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Accessing traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Map
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic scaling of the map {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
237
Route guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Vehicle information
Function Command
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Accessing the trip computer {Trip computer}
Accessing vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Accessing vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Accessing time and date settings {Time and date}
Accessing language and unit settings {Language and units}
238
Function Command
Accessing speed limit settings {Speed}
Activating lighting {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
239
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Airing, refer to Ventilation 89 Ashtray 97
Air outlets, refer to Air vents 85 Assistant systems, refer to
ABS Antilock Brake System 70 Air pressure, checking, refer to – Dynamic Stability Control
Accepting a call 161, 172 Tire inflation pressure 194 DSC 70
Accessories, refer to Vehicle Air recirculation, refer to Audio 134
equipment 4 Recirculated-air – controls 134
Acknowledgment signals for mode 86, 88 – switching on/off 134
locking/unlocking vehicle 28 Air supply – tone control 135
Activated-charcoal filter for – air conditioner 86 – volume 135
automatic climate control 89 – automatic climate control 87 Audio device, external 94
Adaptive Light Control 82 – ventilation 89 Automatic
Adding engine oil 204 Air vents 85 – air distribution 88
Additives AKI, refer to Fuel grade 193 – air flow rate 88
– coolant 205 Alarm system 31 – cruise control 56
– engine oil 204 ALL4 all-wheel drive system 72 – headlamp control 81
Address, entering 120 All-season tires, refer to Winter Automatic climate control 85
Address for navigation tires 201 – automatic air distribution 88
– entering 114, 120 All-wheel drive, refer to Automatic transmission with
Adjusting temperature inside ALL4 72 Steptronic 50
the car, refer to AM, waveband 137 – interlock 51
– Air conditioner 86 Ambient air, refer to – overriding selector lever
– Automatic climate control 87 Recirculated-air lock 52
Adjusting the tone during mode 86, 88 – shiftlock 51
audio operation, refer to Ambient lighting 84 – sport program 51
Tone control 135 Antenna, care 208 AUTO program for automatic
Airbags 78 Antifreeze climate control 88
– sitting safely 37 – coolant 205 Auxiliary phone 169
– warning lamp 80 – washer fluid 55 AUX-In, refer to External audio
Air conditioner 85 Antilock Brake System ABS 70 device 94
Air conditioning mode Anti-theft alarm system, refer AUX-In connection 146
– air conditioner 86 to Alarm system 31 Average fuel consumption 59
– automatic climate control 87 Approved axle loads, refer to – setting the units 62
– ventilation 89 Weights 230 Average speed 60
Air distribution Approved engine oils 204 Avoiding highways for
– automatic 88 Approved gross vehicle navigation 123
– individual 87 weight, refer to Weights 230 Axle loads, refer to
– manual 87 Armrest, refer to Center Weights 230
Air flow rate 86, 88 armrest 94
– air conditioning system 86 Arrival time
– automatic climate control 88 – computer 60
– heating, ventilation 86 – route guidance 123
240
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
B Brake lamps Capacities 231

– replacing bulbs 215 Car battery, refer to Vehicle
Background lighting, refer to Brake pads, breaking in 100 battery 220
Ambient lighting 84 Brake rotors 102 Car care 208
Backrests, refer to Seats 38 – brakes 100 Care 208
Backup lamps – breaking in 100 – car-care products 208
– replacing bulb 215 Brakes – car washes 208
Band-aids, refer to First aid – ABS 70 – CD/DVD drives 211
pouch 222 – breaking in 100 – high-pressure washers 209
Bar, refer to Tow-starting, – MINI Maintenance – leather 210
towing away 224 System 206 – manual washing 209
Base plate for telephone or – parking brake 50 – upholstery and fabrics 210
mobile phone – service requirements 62 – windows 209
– refer to Snap-in adapter 178 Brakes, refer to Braking – wiper blades 209
Bass sounds, refer to Tone safely 101 Cargo, securing 106
control 135 Brake system 100 Cargo area 102
Battery 220 – breaking in 100 – capacity 230
– disposal 34, 220 – disc brakes 102 – Comfort Access 33
– jump-starting 222 – MINI Maintenance – lamp 84
– temporary power failure 220 System 206 – opening from outside 31
Battery renewal Breakdown service, refer to – trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 30
– remote control 34 Roadside Assistance 222 Cargo area, expanding 102
Being towed 224 Breaking in the clutch 100 Cargo area lamp 84
Belts, refer to Safety belts 40 Break-in period 100 Cargo area lid, refer to
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety Brightness of Control Tailgate 30
belts 40 Display 68 Cargo area partition net, refer
Beverage holders, refer to Bulb changing, refer to Lamps to Cargo net 104
Cupholders 97 and bulbs 212 Cargo loading 105
Black ice, refer to External Button for starting the – securing cargo 106
temperature warning 59 engine 48 – stowing cargo 106
Blower, refer to Air flow Buttons on the steering – vehicle 102
rate 86, 88 wheel 11 Cargo net 104
Bluetooth, activating/ Car key, refer to Keys/remote
deactivating 159, 168 C controls 26
Bluetooth audio 150 Carpets, care 210
– device pairing 150 Calendar 184 Car phone
– disconnecting an audio – displaying appointment 184 – installation location, refer to
connection 152 – selecting calendar day 184 Center armrest 94
– playback 151 California Proposition 65 Car phone, refer to
– unpairing device 152 warning 5 Telephone 158, 167
– What to do if... 153 Call Car radio, refer to Radio 137
Bottle holders, refer to – muting the microphone 174 Car wash
Cupholders 97 Call ending 161, 173 – before driving in 50
Brake Assist 70 Calling, refer to Phone Car wash, care 208
Brake fluid, refer to Service numbers, dialing 162, 173 Car washes 208
requirements 62 Can holders, refer to Catalytic converter, refer to
Cupholders 97 Hot exhaust system 101
241
CD, audio playback 144 Clock Control stick, refer to Onboard

CD player 144 – setting time 64 computer 16
– controls 134 – 12 h/24 h mode 64 Control unit, refer to Onboard
– fast forward/reverse 145 Closing computer 16
– random order 145 – from inside 30 Convenience operation
– selecting a track 144 – from outside 27 – windows 28
– switching on/off 134 Clothes hooks 96 Convenient access, refer to
– tone control 135 Cockpit 10 Comfort Access 32
– volume 135 Cold start, refer to Starting the Convenient start, refer to
Center armrest 94 engine 49 Starting the engine 49
Center brake lamp 216 Comfort Access 32 Coolant 205
Center console, refer to – replacing the battery 34 – checking level 205
Around the center – what to observe before – filling 205
console 14 entering a car wash 34 – temperature 205
Center Rail 95 Comfort area, refer to Around Coolant temperature 205
Center Rail, refer to Storage the center console 14 Cooling, maximum 88
compartments 95 Compartment for remote Cooling fluid, refer to
Central locking system 27 control, refer to Ignition Coolant 205
– Comfort Access 32 lock 48 Copyright 2
– from inside 30 Compass 92 Cornering light, refer to
– from outside 27 Computer 59 Adaptive Light Control 82
– setting unlocking – displays on Control Criteria for route 123
behavior 27 Display 60 Cruise control
Changing bulbs 212 Condensation, refer to When – indicator lamp 13
Changing the language on the the vehicle is parked 102 Cruising range 59
Control Display 67 Condition Based Service Cupholders 97
Changing the measurement CBS 206 Curb weight, refer to
units on the Control Configuring settings, refer to Weights 230
Display 62 Personal Profile 26 Current fuel consumption 60
Changing wheels 219 Connecting vacuum cleaner, Current playback
Charging the battery 220 refer to Connecting electrical – external devices 149
Chassis number, refer to appliances 97
Engine compartment 202 Consumption, refer to Average D
Check Control 65 fuel consumption 59
Child restraint fixing system Contact editing 166 Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
LATCH 45 Contacts 165, 181 Dashboard instruments, refer
Child restraint systems 44 – new contact 182 to Displays 12
Child-safety locks 47 Continuing route Dashboard lighting, refer to
Child seats 44 guidance 123 Instrument lighting 83
Chrome parts, care 210 Control Display Data 228
Chrome parts, refer to – adjusting brightness 68 – capacities 231
Care 208 Control Display, refer to iDrive – dimensions 229
Cigarette lighter 97 – switching on/off 16 – engine 228
Cleaning headlamps 54 Control Display, refer to – weights 230
– washer fluid 55 Onboard computer 16 Data memory 207
– adjusting brightness 68
Controls and displays 10
242
Date Display, refer to Onboard Driving tips, refer to Driving

– setting 65 computer controls 16 notes 100
– setting format 65 Displaying contact Dry air, refer to Cooling
Daytime running lights 82 pictures 183 function 89
DBC Dynamic Brake Control, Displaying contacts 165 DSC Dynamic Stability
refer to Brake Assist 70 Displaying special Control 70
Deactivating front passenger destinations 119 DTC Dynamic Traction
airbags 79 Display lighting, refer to Control 71
Deadlocking, refer to Instrument lighting 83 Dynamic Brake Control DBC,
Locking 28 Displays 12 refer to Brake Assist 70
Defect – instrument cluster 12 Dynamic route guidance 130
– door lock 29 – on the Control Display 16 Dynamic Stability Control
– fuel filler flap 192 Displays, care 211 DSC 70
Defining a home address 182 Displays and controls 10 Dynamic Traction Control
Defogging windows 87, 89 Disposal DTC 71
Defrosting windows 87, 89 – of coolant 205
Defrosting windows and – remote control battery 34 E
removing condensation – vehicle battery 220
– air conditioner 87 Distance, refer to Computer 60 Eject button, refer to Buttons
– automatic climate control 89 Distance remaining to service, on the CD player 134
Defrosting windshield, refer to refer to Service Electrical malfunction
Defrosting windows 87, 89 requirements 62 – door lock 29
Defrost position, refer to Distance to destination, refer – fuel filler flap 192
Defrosting windows 87, 89 to Computer 60 Electronic brake-force
Deleting contacts 166, 183 Distance warning, refer to Park distribution 70
Destination address Distance Control PDC 69 Electronic Stability Program
– entering 114, 120 Door key, refer to Integrated ESP, refer to Dynamic
Destination for navigation key/remote control 26 Stability Control DSC 70
– entering 114 Door lock 29 E-mail 184
– entering via map 119 Door lock, confirmation Emergency operation, refer to
Differential, breaking in 100 signals 28 Manual operation
Digital compass 92 Doors, manual operation 29 – door lock 29
Digital radio, refer to HD DOT Quality Grades 198 – fuel filler flap 192
Radio 138 Drinks holders, refer to – transmission lock, automatic
Dimensions 229 Cupholders 97 transmission 52
Dipstick, engine oil 203 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill Emergency services, refer to
Directional indicators, refer to Assist 72 Roadside Assistance 222
Turn signals 53 Driving dynamics control, refer Ending a call 161, 173
Direction announcements, to Sport button 72 Engine
refer to Voice Driving lamps, refer to Parking – breaking in 100
instructions 127 lamps/low beams 81 – data 228
Direction instructions, refer to Driving notes 100 – overheated, refer to Coolant
Voice instructions 127 Driving off on inclines, refer to temperature 205
Directory for navigation, refer Hill Assist 72 – speed 228
to Address book 116 Driving stability control – starting, Comfort Access 32
Displacement, refer to Engine systems 70 Engine compartment 202
data 228 Driving through water 101
243
Engine coolant, refer to External temperature display Flat tires, refer to Tire
Coolant 205 – change units of measure 62 condition 199
Engine malfunction – in the onboard computer 62 Floor mats, care 210
– indicator lamp 13 External temperature Floor plate, refer to Flat load
Engine oil warning 59 floor 104
– additives, refer to Approved Eyes FM, waveband 137
engine oils 204 – for tow-starting and towing Fog lamps
– alternative oil types 204 away 224 – replacing bulb 214
– approved engine oils 204 – for tying down loads 106 Folding rear seat backrest 102
– capacity 204 Footbrake, refer to Braking
– checking level 203 F safely 101
– dipstick 203 Footwell lamps 84
– intervals between changes, Failure messages, refer to For your own safety 5
refer to Service Check Control 65 Four-wheel drive, refer to
requirements 62 Failure of an electrical ALL4 72
– MINI Maintenance consumer 220 Front airbags 78
System 206 Fastening safety belts, refer to Front fog lamps 83
Engine oil level, checking 203 Safety belts 40 – replacing bulb 214
Engine output, refer to Engine Fastest route for Front seat adjustment 38
data 228 navigation 123 Frost on windows, refer to
Engine starting, refer to Fast forward Defrosting windows 87, 89
Starting the engine 49 – CD player 145 FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Entering destination 114 Fault messages, refer to Check Monitor 73
Entering intersection 115 Control 65 Fuel 193
Entertainment sound output Faulty tire 73 – gauge 58
on/off 134 Filter – high-quality brands 193
Entry map for destination 119 – microfilter/activated- – quality 193
ESP Electronic Stability charcoal filter for automatic – specifications 193
Program, refer to Dynamic climate control 89 – tank capacity 231
Stability Control DSC 70 – microfilter for air Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
Exhaust system, refer to Hot conditioner 87 gauge 58
exhaust system 101 Fine wood, care 211 Fuel consumption display
Exterior mirrors 42 First aid pouch 222 – average fuel consumption 59
– adjusting 42 Fixture for remote control, Fuel display, refer to Fuel
– automatic dimming refer to Ignition lock 48 gauge 58
feature 43 Flash when locking/ Fuel filler flap 192
– automatic heating 42 unlocking 28 – releasing in the event of
– folding in and out 42 Flat load floor 104 electrical malfunction 192
External audio device 94 Flat tire Fuses 220
External audio device, refer to – run-flat tires 200
AUX-In connection 146 – Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 75 G
External care 208 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 73
External devices – indicating a flat tire 73 Garage door opener, refer to
– random play sequence 149 – initializing the system 73 Integrated universal remote
– software update 153 – snow chains 73 control 90
– system limits 73
244
Gasoline, refer to Headlamp glass lens 213 Ignition 48

– Average fuel Headlamps – switched off 49
consumption 59 – care 209 – switched on 48
– Required fuel 193 – replacing bulb 213 Ignition key, refer to
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel Head Light, refer to Adaptive Integrated key/remote
gauge 58 Light Control 82 control 26
Gear indicator Head restraints 39 Ignition key position 1, refer to
– automatic transmission with – sitting safely 37 Radio readiness 48
Steptronic 51 Heated Ignition key position 2, refer to
Gear shifting – mirrors 42 Ignition on 48
– automatic transmission 51 – rear window 87, 88 Ignition lock 48
– manual transmission 50 – seats 40 Imprint 2
Gearshift lever Heating 85 Incoming call 161, 172
– automatic transmission with – mirrors 42 Indicator and warning
Steptronic 51 – rear window 87, 88 lamps 13
– manual transmission 50 – seats 40 – Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 76
General driving notes 100 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing Indicator lighting, refer to
Glass roof, electric 34 cargo 106 Instrument lighting 83
– convenience Height, refer to Individual air distribution 87
operation 28, 29 Dimensions 229 Individual settings, refer to
– opening, closing 35 Height adjustment Personal Profile 26
– remote control 28 – seats 38 Inflation pressure monitoring,
– tilting 35 – steering wheel 43 refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
Glove compartment 94 High beams 83 TPM 75
GPS navigation, refer to – headlamp flasher 83 Information
Navigation system 112 – indicator lamp 13, 86, 89 – on another location 118
Grills, refer to Air vents 85 – replacing bulb 213 – on current position 118
Gross vehicle weight, refer to High water, refer to Driving – on destination location 118
Weights 230 through water 101 Initializing
Highway, refer to Route – compass, refer to
H criteria 123 Calibration 93
Hill Assist 72 – Flat Tire Monitor FTM 73
Halogen lamps Hills 101 – glass roof, electric 35
– replacing bulb 213 Holders for cups 97 – radio, refer to Station,
Handbrake, refer to Parking Homepage 4 storing 138
brake 50 Hood 203 Instructions for navigation
Hands-free device Horn 10 system, refer to Voice
Bluetooth 158 Hot exhaust system 101 instructions 127
Hands-free Hydroplaning 101 Instrument cluster, refer to
system 14, 164, 176 Displays 12
Hazard warning flashers 14 I Instrument lighting 83
HD Radio 138 Instrument panel, refer to
Head airbags 78 IBOC, refer to HD Radio 138 – Cockpit 10
Headlamp control, Ice warning, refer to External – Displays 12
automatic 81 temperature warning 59 Integrated key 26
Headlamp flasher 53 Integrated universal remote
– indicator lamp 11, 13, 86, 89 control 90
245
Interactive map 120 Lashing eyes, refer to Securing Lower back support, refer to
Interesting destination for cargo 106 Lumbar support 38
navigation 118 Last destinations 117 Luggage compartment
Interior lamps 84 LATCH child restraint fixing – doors, refer to Tailgate 30
– remote control 28 system 45 Luggage compartment
Interior rearview mirror 43 Leather care 210 partition net, refer to Cargo
– automatic dimming LEDs light-emitting diodes 213 net 104
feature 43 Length, refer to Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
Interlock 51 Dimensions 229 mounted luggage rack 107
Intermittent mode of the License plate lamp Lumbar support 38
wipers 53 – bulb replacement 216
Internal care 210 Light M
Internet page 4 – automatic headlamp
control 81 M+S tires, refer to Winter
J Light alloy wheels, care 210 tires 201
Light-emitting diodes Main menu 17
Jacking points 219 LEDs 213 Maintenance, refer to Service
Jets, refer to Window washer Lighter 97 and Warranty Information
nozzles 55 – socket 97 Booklet for US models and
Joystick, refer to Onboard Lighting Service Guide Booklet for
computer 16 – lamps and bulbs 212 Canadian models
Jumpering, refer to Jump- – of the instruments 83 Maintenance system 206
starting 222 – of vehicle, refer to Lamps 81 Malfunction warnings, refer to
Jump-starting 222 Light switch 81 Check Control 65
Limit, refer to Speed limit 67 Manual air distribution 87
K Load 105 Manual mode
Load securing equipment, – automatic transmission with
Key, refer to Keys/remote refer to Securing cargo 106 Steptronic 51
controls 26 Lock buttons of doors, refer to Manual operation
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort Locking 30 – door lock 29
Access 32 Locking – fuel filler flap 192
Keyless opening and closing, – adjusting confirmation – transmission lock, automatic
refer to Comfort Access 32 signal 28 transmission 52
Key Memory, refer to Personal – from inside 30 Manual transmission 50
Profile 26 – from outside 28 Manual washing 209
Keypad dialing 163, 174 – without remote control, refer Map
Kickdown 51 to Comfort Access 32 – changing scale 126
– automatic transmission with Locking and unlocking doors Map for navigation
Steptronic 51 – confirmation signals 28 – entering destination 119
Knock control 193 – from inside 30 Master key, refer to Integrated
– from outside 27 key/remote control 26
L Longlife oils Maximum cooling 88
– approved motor oils 204 Maximum speed
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/ Low beams 81 – with winter tires 201
Low beams 81 – automatic 81 Medical assistance, refer to
Lamps and bulbs, replacing – replacing bulb 213 First aid pouch 222
bulbs 212 MENU button 16
246
Menus, refer to Onboard Multifunction switch, refer to Nylon rope, refer to Tow
computer 16 – Turn signals/headlamp rope 225
Messages 183 flasher 53
Microfilter – Wiper system 53 O
– for air conditioner 87
– for automatic climate N OBD socket, refer to Socket for
control 89 On-Board Diagnosis 207
– MINI Maintenance Navigation data 112 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
System 206 Navigation destination specifications 193
Microfilter/activated-charcoal – entering manually 114, 120 Odometer 59
filter – home address 117 Office 180
– MINI Maintenance Navigation instructions, refer – current office 180
System 206 to Switching voice – What to do if…. 186
Microphone for telephone 14 instructions on/off 127 Oil, refer to Engine oil 203
MINI Connected 188 Navigation system 112 Oil consumption 203
MINI Internet page 4 – address book 116 Oil level 203
MINI joystick, refer to Onboard – bypassing a route Oil types 204
computer 16 section 124 Old batteries, refer to
MINI Maintenance System 206 – continuing route Disposal 220
Mirror dimming feature 43 guidance 123 Onboard computer 16
Mirrors 42 – destination entry 114 – changing language 67
– exterior mirrors 42 – dynamic route guidance 130 – menu guidance 17
– heating 42 – entering a destination – operating principles 16
– interior rearview mirror 43 manually 114, 120 – overview 16
Mobile phone – planning a trip 121 – status information 19
– adjusting volume 161, 172 – route list 124 Opening and closing
– connecting, refer to Mobile – selecting destination via – Comfort Access 32
phone, pairing 158, 168 map 119 – from inside 30
– installation location, refer to – selecting route criteria 123 – from outside 27
Center armrest 94 – special destinations 118 – using the door lock 29
– pairing 158, 168 – starting route guidance 123 – using the remote control 27
– What to do if…. 160, 171 – storing current position 116 Opening and unlocking
Mobile phone preparation – terminating route – from inside 30
Bluetooth 167 guidance 123 Options, selecting for
Mobility Kit 216 – voice instructions 127 navigation 123
Modifications, technical, refer – volume adjustment 127 Orientation menu, refer to
to For your own safety 5 Neck support, refer to Head Main menu 17
Monitor, refer to MINI controls restraints 39 Outlets, refer to
with navigation 16 Nets, refer to Storage – Air vents 85
Monitoring system for tire compartments 95 – Ventilation 89
pressures, refer to Flat Tire New tires 200 Output, refer to Engine
Monitor 73 North-facing map 125 data 228
Multifunctional steering Notes 185 Outside-air mode
wheel, refer to Buttons on Number of cylinders, refer to – automatic climate control 88
the steering wheel 11 Engine data 228 Overheated engine, refer to
Number of safety belts 37 Coolant temperature 205
247
P R Reception
– quality 138
Paintwork, care 209 Radio – radio station 138
Park Distance Control PDC 69 – controls 134 Recirculated-air mode 86, 88
Parking – HD Radio 138 Recirculation of air, refer to
– vehicle 49 – satellite radio 139 Recirculated-air
Parking aid, refer to Park – select waveband 137 mode 86, 88
Distance Control PDC 69 – storing stations 138 Reclining seat, refer to
Parking brake 50 – switching on/off 134 Backrest 38
– indicator lamp 13 – tone control 135 Refueling 192
Parking lamps, replacing – volume 135 Rejecting a call 161, 173
bulb 214 Radio key, refer to Integrated Releasing
Parking lamps/low beams 81 key/remote control 26 – hood 203
Parts and accessories, refer to Radio position, refer to Radio Reminders 185
Vehicle equipment 4 readiness 48 Remote control 26
Pathway lighting 82 Radio readiness 48 – battery renewal 34
Personal Profile 26 – switched off 49 – Comfort Access 32
Phone numbers – switched on 48 – garage door opener 90
– dialing 162, 173 Rain sensor 54 – malfunctions 29, 34
Pinch protection system Random play sequence – service data 206
– windows 36 – external devices 149 – tailgate 28
Plastic parts, care 211 Range, refer to Cruising Replacement remote
Pollen, refer to range 59 control 26
– Microfilter/activated- Reading aloud 186 Replacing bulbs, refer to
charcoal filter for automatic Reading lamps 84 Lamps and bulbs 212
climate control 89 Rear lamps Replacing tires, refer to New
– Microfilter for air – bulb replacement 215 wheels and tires 200
conditioner 87 Rear lamps, refer to Tail Reporting safety defects 6
Power failure 220 lamps 215 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
Power window Rear-mounted luggage gauge 58
– safety switch 36 rack 107 Reservoir for washer
Power windows 35 Rear seat backrest, folding 102 systems 55
Power windows, refer to Rear seats Reset, refer to Resetting tone
Windows 35 – adjusting 39 settings 136
Pressure, tires 194 – folding down the Restraint systems
Pressure monitoring, tires 73 backrests 102 – for children 44
– Flat Tire Monitor 73 Rearview mirror – refer to Safety belts 40
Pressure monitoring of tires, – compass 92 Reverse
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor Rearview mirror, refer to – CD player 145
TPM 75 Mirrors 42 Reverse gear
Protective function, refer to Rear window – automatic transmission with
Pinch protection system – windshield wiper 55 Steptronic 51
– windows 36 Rear window defroster 87, 88 – manual transmission 50
Puncture Rear window safety switch 36 Road map 125
– Flat Tire Monitor 73
248
Roadside Assistance 222 S Securing the vehicle

Roadside parking lamps 83 – from inside 30
– replacing bulb 214 Safety belt – from outside 27
Road worthiness test, refer to – number 37 Selecting navigation
Service requirements 62 Safety Belt Reminder 42 system 112
Roof load capacity 230 Safety belts 40 Selecting new scale for
Roof-mounted luggage – center belt 41 navigation 126
rack 107 – damage 42 Selector lever
Rope, refer to Tow-starting, – indicator lamp 42 – automatic transmission with
towing away 225 – reminder 42 Steptronic 51
Route 123, 124 – sitting safely 37 Selector lever lock
– bypassing sections 124 Safety belts, care 211 – automatic transmission with
– changing 123, 124 Safety systems Steptronic, refer to
– changing criteria 123 – airbags 78 Shiftlock 51
– displaying arrow view 124 – Antilock Brake System – overriding manually 52
– displaying map view 125 ABS 70 Selector lever positions
– displaying streets or towns/ – driving stability control – automatic transmission with
cities 124 systems 70 Steptronic 51
– selecting 123 – Dynamic Stability Control Service, refer to Roadside
Route guidance 123 DSC 70 Assistance 222
– bypassing a route – safety belts 40 Service car, refer to Roadside
section 124 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat Assistance 222
– changing specified route 123 tires 200 Service data in the remote
– distance and arrival 123 Satellite radio 139 control 206
– voice instructions 127 – channel, activating or Service Interval Display, refer
– volume of voice deactivating 140 to Condition Based Service
instructions 127 – channel, selecting 140 CBS 206
Route section, changing 124 – channel, storing 141 Service requirement display,
Route selection 123 – favorites 142 refer to Condition Based
RSC Run-flat System – time shift 141 Service CBS 206
Component, refer to Run-flat – Traffic Jump 143 Service requirements 62
tires 200 Screen, refer to Onboard Settings
Rubber parts, care 210 computer controls 16 – clock, 12 h/24 h mode 64
Run-flat System Component Screw thread for tow – date format 65
RSC, refer to Run-flat fitting 224 – language 67
tires 200 SDARS, refer to Satellite Settings and information 60
Run-flat tires 200 radio 139 Setting time and date 65
– flat tire 73 Seat adjustment Setting time zone, time, and
– Flat Tire Monitor 73 – mechanical 38 date 65
– tire inflation pressure 194 – rear 39 Shifting gears
– tire replacement 200 Seats 38 – automatic transmission with
– winter tires 201 – adjusting the seats 38 Steptronic 51
– heating 40 – manual transmission 50
– sitting safely 37
249
Shiftlock Speed 228 Storage area

– automatic transmission, refer – with winter tires 201 – cargo area 102
to Changing selector lever Speed limit 67 Storage compartments 95
positions 51 – setting 67 Storage space
Shift paddles 52 Speed limit warning, refer to – storage compartments 95
Short commands for the voice Speed limit 67 Storing a destination in the
activation system 232 Speedo, refer to address book 116
Short route in navigation, refer Speedometer 12 Storing the vehicle 211
to Selecting route 123 Speedometer 12 Storing tires 201
Shuffled, refer to Random Speed volume 135 Stowage, refer to Storage
– CD player 145 Split rear seat backrest, refer to compartments 95
Side airbags 78 Expanding the cargo Summer tires, refer to Wheels
Side marker lamps, replacing area 102 and tires 194
bulbs 215 Sport button 72 SW, waveband 137
Side turn signal Stability control, refer to Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
– replacing bulb 215 Driving stability control Switching off
Side windows, refer to systems 70 – engine 49
Windows 35 Start/Stop button 48 Switching off the engine 49
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 – starting the engine 49 – Start/Stop button 48
Sitting safely 37 – switching off the engine 49 Switching on
– airbags 37 Starting, refer to Starting the – audio 134
– safety belts 37 engine 49 – CD player 134
– with head restraint 37 Starting assistance, refer to – radio 134
Size, refer to Dimensions 229 Jump-starting 222 Switching the cooling function
Sliding/tilt sunroof Starting route guidance 123 on and off 89
– refer to Glass roof, electric 34 Starting the engine 49 Symbols 4
Slot for remote control 48 – Start/Stop button 48 – status information 19
Smokers' package, refer to Start-off assistance, refer to
Ashtray 97 – DSC 70 T
Snap-in adapter – Hill Assist 72
– inserting/removing 178 State/province, for Tachometer 58
– use 167 navigation 114 Tailgate 30
Snap-in adapter, refer to Station, selecting – Comfort Access 33
Center armrest storage – radio 137 – opening/closing 31
compartment 94 Status information on the – opening from outside 31
Snow chains 201 Control Display 19 – unlocking with remote
Socket, refer to Connecting Status of this Owner's Manual control 28
electrical appliances 97 at time of printing 4 Tail lamp, refer to Tail
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis Steering wheel 43 lamps 215
OBD 207 – adjustment 43 – replacing bulb 215
Software update 153 – buttons on steering wheel 11 Tail lamps 215
Speaking, refer to Voice – lock 48 Tank volume, refer to
instructions from navigation – shift paddles 52 Capacities 231
system 127 Steptronic, refer to Automatic Target cursor for
Special destinations 118 transmission with navigation 119
Special oils, refer to Approved Steptronic 50 Tasks 185
engine oils 204
250
Technical data 228 Tires TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Technical modifications 5 – age 200 Monitor 75
Telephone – breaking in 100 Track
– hands-free system 164, 176 – changing, refer to Changing – selecting on CD 144
– installation location, refer to wheels 219 Track width, refer to
Center armrest 94 – condition 199 Dimension 229
– voice commands 176 – damage 199 Traction control, refer to
Telephone receiving power, – inflation pressure 194 – Dynamic Stability Control
refer to Status – inflation pressure loss 76 DSC 70
information 19 – minimum tread depth 199 Traffic bulletins
Temperature display – new tires 200 – categories 129
– setting the units 62 – pressure monitoring, refer to Traffic bulletins, filtering 129
Temperature of coolant, refer Flat Tire Monitor 73 Traffic congestion
to Coolant temperature 205 – pressure monitoring, refer to – displaying traffic
Temperature setting Tire Pressure Monitor information 127
– air conditioner 86 TPM 75 – refer to Route, bypassing
– automatic climate control 88 – puncture 73 segments 124
Tempomat, refer to Cruise – size 198 Traffic information for
control 56 – wear indicators, refer to navigation
Tensioning straps, refer to Minimum tread depth 199 – displaying 128
Securing cargo 106 – winter tires 201 Traffic information in
Text message 183 – with emergency operation navigation
Third brake lamp, refer to properties 200 – screen display in the map
Center brake lamp 216 Tires with emergency view 129
Three-point safety belt 40 operation properties, refer to Transmission
Tightening the lug bolts Run-flat tires 200 – automatic transmission with
– torque 220 Tires with safety features, refer Steptronic 50
Tightening torque, refer to to Run-flat tires 200 – manual transmission 50
Tightening lug bolts 220 TMC station, refer to Traffic – overriding selector lever lock
Tire failure information 127 for automatic transmission
– Flat Tire Monitor 73 Tone with Steptronic 52
– indicator/warning lamp 73 – middle setting 136 Transporting children safely 44
– MINI Mobility Kit 216 Tone during audio playback Transport securing devices,
– run-flat tires 74 – adjusting 135 refer to Securing cargo 106
– Tire Pressure Monitor 75 Torque 228 Tread depth, refer to Minimum
Tire inflation pressure 194 – lug bolts 220 tire tread 199
– loss 73, 75 Tow bar 224 Treble, refer to Tone
Tire pressure monitoring, refer Tow fitting 224 control 135
to Flat Tire Monitor 73 – screw thread 224 Trip computer 60
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 75 Tow fittings for tow-starting Trip-distance counter, refer to
– limitations of system 75 and towing away 224 Trip odometer 59
– resetting system 76 Towing 223 Triple turn signal activation 53
– warning lamp 76 – car with automatic Trip odometer 59
Tire Quality Grading 198 transmission 224 Turning circle, refer to
– methods 224 Dimensions 229
Tow rope 225
Tow-starting 223
251
Turn signal 53 Vehicle jack Welcome lamps 82

– front, replacing bulb 214 – jacking points 219 Wheelbase, refer to
– indicator lamp 12, 13 Ventilation Dimensions 229
– rear, replacing bulb 215 – air conditioner 89 Wheels, new 200
– side, replacing bulb 215 Ventilation, refer to Climate Wheels and tires 194
Tying down loads, refer to control 85 Width, refer to
Cargo loading 106 Vents, refer to Air vents 85 Dimensions 229
Vents, refer to Ventilation 89 Windows 35
U Voice commands – closing 35
– overview 21 – convenience operation 28
Uniform Tire Quality Grading – short commands 232 – opening 35
UTQR 198 – telephone 176 – pinch protection system 36
Units Voice instructions for – safety switch 36
– average fuel consumption 62 navigation system 127 Windows, indicator on Control
– temperature 62 – repeating 127 Display 16
Universal garage door opener, – switching on/off 127 Window washer, refer to
refer to Integrated universal – volume 127 Washer fluid 55
remote control 90 Voice phone book 177 Window washer reservoir,
Universal remote control 90 Volume 134 refer to Washer fluid
Unlatching, refer to – audio sources 134 – volume, refer to
Unlocking 33 – mobile phone 161, 172 Capacities 231
Unlocking – voice instructions 127 Window washer system 53
– from inside 30 Volume balance, tone – washer fluid 55
– from outside 27 setting 135 – washer jets 55
– setting unlocking Volume of cargo area 230 Windshield
behavior 27 – cleaning 54
– tailgate 33 W – defrosting and removing
– without remote control, refer condensation 87, 89
to Comfort Access 32 Warning and indicator Windshield wiper blades,
Updating navigation data 112 lamps 13 changing 212
Upholstery, care 210 Warning messages, refer to Windshield wipers, refer to
USB audio interface 147 Check Control 65 Wiper system 53
USB interface 94 Warning triangle 222 Winter tires 201
Using contact data 186 Washer/wiper system – setting speed limit 67
– washer fluid 55 – storage 201
V Washer fluid 55 Wiper blade replacement 212
– capacity of reservoir 55 Wiper system 53
Vehicle Washer fluid reservoir 55 Word matching principle for
– battery 220 Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 97 navigation 122
– breaking in 100 Waterfall lighting, refer to Work in the engine
– cargo loading 102 Ambient lighting 84 compartment 203
– dimensions 229 Water on roads, refer to
– identification number, refer Driving through water 101 X
to Engine compartment 202 Waveband for radio 137
– parking 49 Wear indicators in tires, refer to Xenon lamps
– storage 211 Minimum tread depth 199 – replacing bulb 213
– weight 230 Weights 230
252
*BL2904220009*
01 40 2 904 220 ue
DRIVE ME.

MINI Countryman Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINI Countryman Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINI Countryman Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

For your safety Installation and operation of accessories that

Service and warranty If the vehicle is not maintained according to

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Around the steering wheel

1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors in and out 42 7 Buttons on steering wheel,

Automatic headlamp control 81 Storing speed and accelerating or

Resetting the trip odometer 58 Telephone

5 Switching the ignition on/off and

8 Horn: the entire surface

1 Tachometer 58 4 Display for

3 Resetting the trip odometer 58 > Odometer and trip odometer 58

Indicator and warning

You can call up more information, e.g. on the

Explanatory text messages Front fog lamps 83

Engine malfunction with adverse effect

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Cruise control 56

Around the center console

1 Hazard warning flashers 4 Air conditioner or automatic climate

3 Radio/CD 137 Temperature

Changing the audio source

Changing the radio station or track

Ejecting CD Air distribution to the upper body

7 Changing to a different menu on the Control

Rear window defroster

Air flow rate

Glass roof, electric 34

Front fog lamps 83

Safety switch for power windows in

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment Control Display

In this chapter, all production, country, and Notes

Switching Control Display off/on

To switch on, press the MINI joystick.

2. Tilting in four directions. Opening the main menu

Buttons on MINI joystick

Accessing the main menu

2. Press the MINI joystick.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels The following is displayed in the "Options"

View of a menu that has been called up Activating/deactivating functions

Example: setting the clock Status information

5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and

Letters and numbers

Vehicle equipment Switching between letters and numbers

Entering letters and

Move the MINI joystick

Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Saying commands

Terminating or canceling voice Using alternative commands

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 904 220 - © 03/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment In addition, information about service require-